WO2023220438A1 - Intelligence - Google Patents
Intelligence Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2023220438A1 WO2023220438A1 PCT/US2023/022140 US2023022140W WO2023220438A1 WO 2023220438 A1 WO2023220438 A1 WO 2023220438A1 US 2023022140 W US2023022140 W US 2023022140W WO 2023220438 A1 WO2023220438 A1 WO 2023220438A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- building
- tintable windows
- virtual
- sky
- tint
- Prior art date
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 207
- 230000002238 attenuated effect Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 48
- 230000005855 radiation Effects 0.000 claims description 14
- 230000001154 acute effect Effects 0.000 claims 1
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 74
- 238000005457 optimization Methods 0.000 description 67
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 62
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 description 53
- 230000007704 transition Effects 0.000 description 46
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 32
- 230000006854 communication Effects 0.000 description 32
- 150000002500 ions Chemical class 0.000 description 32
- 239000013598 vector Substances 0.000 description 32
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 27
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 27
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 27
- 230000004907 flux Effects 0.000 description 26
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 description 23
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 23
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 20
- 230000015654 memory Effects 0.000 description 20
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 description 18
- 230000002452 interceptive effect Effects 0.000 description 15
- 238000004088 simulation Methods 0.000 description 15
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 15
- 238000007726 management method Methods 0.000 description 14
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 12
- 238000000151 deposition Methods 0.000 description 11
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 11
- 230000004888 barrier function Effects 0.000 description 10
- 230000008021 deposition Effects 0.000 description 10
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 10
- 238000009792 diffusion process Methods 0.000 description 10
- 230000007613 environmental effect Effects 0.000 description 10
- 230000000007 visual effect Effects 0.000 description 10
- 238000005286 illumination Methods 0.000 description 9
- 238000013507 mapping Methods 0.000 description 9
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 8
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 8
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 8
- AMWRITDGCCNYAT-UHFFFAOYSA-L hydroxy(oxo)manganese;manganese Chemical compound [Mn].O[Mn]=O.O[Mn]=O AMWRITDGCCNYAT-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 8
- 229910001416 lithium ion Inorganic materials 0.000 description 8
- 125000006850 spacer group Chemical group 0.000 description 8
- HBBGRARXTFLTSG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Lithium ion Chemical compound [Li+] HBBGRARXTFLTSG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- 238000013528 artificial neural network Methods 0.000 description 7
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 7
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 7
- 229910001930 tungsten oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 7
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 6
- 238000012217 deletion Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000037430 deletion Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000010438 heat treatment Methods 0.000 description 6
- 229910044991 metal oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 6
- 150000004706 metal oxides Chemical class 0.000 description 6
- USPVIMZDBBWXGM-UHFFFAOYSA-N nickel;oxotungsten Chemical compound [Ni].[W]=O USPVIMZDBBWXGM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- QGLKJKCYBOYXKC-UHFFFAOYSA-N nonaoxidotritungsten Chemical compound O=[W]1(=O)O[W](=O)(=O)O[W](=O)(=O)O1 QGLKJKCYBOYXKC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 239000005328 architectural glass Substances 0.000 description 5
- CURLTUGMZLYLDI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carbon dioxide Chemical compound O=C=O CURLTUGMZLYLDI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 101150110932 US19 gene Proteins 0.000 description 4
- XLOMVQKBTHCTTD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Zinc monoxide Chemical compound [Zn]=O XLOMVQKBTHCTTD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 230000003190 augmentative effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000001413 cellular effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000005265 energy consumption Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000009434 installation Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000012804 iterative process Methods 0.000 description 4
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 4
- 230000000149 penetrating effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000002834 transmittance Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000012800 visualization Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000013316 zoning Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000002835 absorbance Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000004378 air conditioning Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000006399 behavior Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000012423 maintenance Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000012544 monitoring process Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000003068 static effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- XKRFYHLGVUSROY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Argon Chemical compound [Ar] XKRFYHLGVUSROY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- WHXSMMKQMYFTQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N Lithium Chemical compound [Li] WHXSMMKQMYFTQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 101150114976 US21 gene Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 238000004458 analytical method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000003491 array Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000001569 carbon dioxide Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910002092 carbon dioxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000004020 conductor Substances 0.000 description 2
- QDOXWKRWXJOMAK-UHFFFAOYSA-N dichromium trioxide Chemical compound O=[Cr]O[Cr]=O QDOXWKRWXJOMAK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- -1 e.g. Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000005329 float glass Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000007789 gas Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910003437 indium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- PJXISJQVUVHSOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N indium(iii) oxide Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[In+3].[In+3] PJXISJQVUVHSOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- AMGQUBHHOARCQH-UHFFFAOYSA-N indium;oxotin Chemical compound [In].[Sn]=O AMGQUBHHOARCQH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000009830 intercalation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000002687 intercalation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000002955 isolation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000000670 limiting effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000007788 liquid Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052744 lithium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 230000033001 locomotion Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910000480 nickel oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- URLJKFSTXLNXLG-UHFFFAOYSA-N niobium(5+);oxygen(2-) Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[Nb+5].[Nb+5] URLJKFSTXLNXLG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 150000004767 nitrides Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 238000000059 patterning Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000003014 reinforcing effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000009877 rendering Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000002441 reversible effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229910001925 ruthenium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- WOCIAKWEIIZHES-UHFFFAOYSA-N ruthenium(iv) oxide Chemical compound O=[Ru]=O WOCIAKWEIIZHES-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000005070 sampling Methods 0.000 description 2
- LIVNPJMFVYWSIS-UHFFFAOYSA-N silicon monoxide Chemical class [Si-]#[O+] LIVNPJMFVYWSIS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910052814 silicon oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- XOLBLPGZBRYERU-UHFFFAOYSA-N tin dioxide Chemical compound O=[Sn]=O XOLBLPGZBRYERU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910001887 tin oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- QHGNHLZPVBIIPX-UHFFFAOYSA-N tin(ii) oxide Chemical class [Sn]=O QHGNHLZPVBIIPX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- ZNOKGRXACCSDPY-UHFFFAOYSA-N tungsten trioxide Chemical compound O=[W](=O)=O ZNOKGRXACCSDPY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000010200 validation analysis Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000011787 zinc oxide Substances 0.000 description 2
- 241000256844 Apis mellifera Species 0.000 description 1
- 230000005457 Black-body radiation Effects 0.000 description 1
- QPLDLSVMHZLSFG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Copper oxide Chemical compound [Cu]=O QPLDLSVMHZLSFG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DGAQECJNVWCQMB-PUAWFVPOSA-M Ilexoside XXIX Chemical compound C[C@@H]1CC[C@@]2(CC[C@@]3(C(=CC[C@H]4[C@]3(CC[C@@H]5[C@@]4(CC[C@@H](C5(C)C)OS(=O)(=O)[O-])C)C)[C@@H]2[C@]1(C)O)C)C(=O)O[C@H]6[C@@H]([C@H]([C@@H]([C@H](O6)CO)O)O)O.[Na+] DGAQECJNVWCQMB-PUAWFVPOSA-M 0.000 description 1
- BPQQTUXANYXVAA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Orthosilicate Chemical compound [O-][Si]([O-])([O-])[O-] BPQQTUXANYXVAA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GWEVSGVZZGPLCZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Titan oxide Chemical compound O=[Ti]=O GWEVSGVZZGPLCZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 101150071882 US17 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- LFYMLMKKOJHYFY-UHFFFAOYSA-N [O-2].[Al+3].[Ni+2] Chemical compound [O-2].[Al+3].[Ni+2] LFYMLMKKOJHYFY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QLEJXAMHPYMIFG-UHFFFAOYSA-N [O-2].[Al+3].[Si+4].[Li+].[O-2].[O-2].[O-2] Chemical compound [O-2].[Al+3].[Si+4].[Li+].[O-2].[O-2].[O-2] QLEJXAMHPYMIFG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FLAMVRNMRAHFGQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N [O-2].[V+5].[Ni+2] Chemical compound [O-2].[V+5].[Ni+2] FLAMVRNMRAHFGQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YAIQCYZCSGLAAN-UHFFFAOYSA-N [Si+4].[O-2].[Al+3] Chemical compound [Si+4].[O-2].[Al+3] YAIQCYZCSGLAAN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000007792 addition Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000654 additive Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000996 additive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000004075 alteration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003667 anti-reflective effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052786 argon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000013473 artificial intelligence Methods 0.000 description 1
- QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N atomic oxygen Chemical compound [O] QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000007175 bidirectional communication Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002457 bidirectional effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000001642 boronic acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000004364 calculation method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052799 carbon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000010267 cellular communication Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000003153 chemical reaction reagent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000005229 chemical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 1
- OLFCLHDBKGQITG-UHFFFAOYSA-N chromium(3+) nickel(2+) oxygen(2-) Chemical compound [Ni+2].[O-2].[Cr+3] OLFCLHDBKGQITG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000007635 classification algorithm Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000011248 coating agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- KAGOZRSGIYZEKW-UHFFFAOYSA-N cobalt(3+);oxygen(2-) Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[Co+3].[Co+3] KAGOZRSGIYZEKW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000003086 colorant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004040 coloring Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000295 complement effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002131 composite material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000007796 conventional method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000001816 cooling Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- JAONJTDQXUSBGG-UHFFFAOYSA-N dialuminum;dizinc;oxygen(2-) Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[Al+3].[Al+3].[Zn+2].[Zn+2] JAONJTDQXUSBGG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910003460 diamond Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000010432 diamond Substances 0.000 description 1
- GNTDGMZSJNCJKK-UHFFFAOYSA-N divanadium pentaoxide Chemical compound O=[V](=O)O[V](=O)=O GNTDGMZSJNCJKK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000002019 doping agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000009429 electrical wiring Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000007772 electrode material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000003792 electrolyte Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000499 gel Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000005484 gravity Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003306 harvesting Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000013007 heat curing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052739 hydrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000001257 hydrogen Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000977 initiatory effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002347 injection Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000007924 injection Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000010354 integration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000010416 ion conductor Substances 0.000 description 1
- LUXYLEKXHLMESQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N iridium(3+);oxygen(2-) Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[Ir+3].[Ir+3] LUXYLEKXHLMESQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DCYOBGZUOMKFPA-UHFFFAOYSA-N iron(2+);iron(3+);octadecacyanide Chemical compound [Fe+2].[Fe+2].[Fe+2].[Fe+3].[Fe+3].[Fe+3].[Fe+3].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-] DCYOBGZUOMKFPA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000005340 laminated glass Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000000608 laser ablation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003698 laser cutting Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000001459 lithography Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000010801 machine learning Methods 0.000 description 1
- BXNFVPMHMPQBRO-UHFFFAOYSA-N magnesium nickel(2+) oxygen(2-) Chemical compound [O--].[O--].[Mg++].[Ni++] BXNFVPMHMPQBRO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000007257 malfunction Effects 0.000 description 1
- BLYYANNQIHKJMU-UHFFFAOYSA-N manganese(2+) nickel(2+) oxygen(2-) Chemical compound [O--].[O--].[Mn++].[Ni++] BLYYANNQIHKJMU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940050561 matrix product Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000001404 mediated effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000002739 metals Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000010295 mobile communication Methods 0.000 description 1
- JKQOBWVOAYFWKG-UHFFFAOYSA-N molybdenum trioxide Chemical compound O=[Mo](=O)=O JKQOBWVOAYFWKG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000008450 motivation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007935 neutral effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- GNMQOUGYKPVJRR-UHFFFAOYSA-N nickel(3+);oxygen(2-) Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[Ni+3].[Ni+3] GNMQOUGYKPVJRR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910000484 niobium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000013307 optical fiber Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000011368 organic material Substances 0.000 description 1
- GNRSAWUEBMWBQH-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxonickel Chemical compound [Ni]=O GNRSAWUEBMWBQH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VVRQVWSVLMGPRN-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxotungsten Chemical class [W]=O VVRQVWSVLMGPRN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000001301 oxygen Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052760 oxygen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- BPUBBGLMJRNUCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxygen(2-);tantalum(5+) Chemical class [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[Ta+5].[Ta+5] BPUBBGLMJRNUCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000013618 particulate matter Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004033 plastic Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000000513 principal component analysis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012913 prioritisation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001681 protective effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960003351 prussian blue Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000013225 prussian blue Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000011347 resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920005989 resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 230000027756 respiratory electron transport chain Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012216 screening Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000004760 silicates Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000005245 sintering Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000004984 smart glass Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000005361 soda-lime glass Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052708 sodium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000011734 sodium Substances 0.000 description 1
- HUAUNKAZQWMVFY-UHFFFAOYSA-M sodium;oxocalcium;hydroxide Chemical compound [OH-].[Na+].[Ca]=O HUAUNKAZQWMVFY-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 230000003595 spectral effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910001220 stainless steel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000010935 stainless steel Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000002195 synergetic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910001936 tantalum oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000012360 testing method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000012780 transparent material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000009423 ventilation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000012855 volatile organic compound Substances 0.000 description 1
Classifications
-
- E—FIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
- E06—DOORS, WINDOWS, SHUTTERS, OR ROLLER BLINDS IN GENERAL; LADDERS
- E06B—FIXED OR MOVABLE CLOSURES FOR OPENINGS IN BUILDINGS, VEHICLES, FENCES OR LIKE ENCLOSURES IN GENERAL, e.g. DOORS, WINDOWS, BLINDS, GATES
- E06B9/00—Screening or protective devices for wall or similar openings, with or without operating or securing mechanisms; Closures of similar construction
- E06B9/24—Screens or other constructions affording protection against light, especially against sunshine; Similar screens for privacy or appearance; Slat blinds
-
- E—FIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
- E06—DOORS, WINDOWS, SHUTTERS, OR ROLLER BLINDS IN GENERAL; LADDERS
- E06B—FIXED OR MOVABLE CLOSURES FOR OPENINGS IN BUILDINGS, VEHICLES, FENCES OR LIKE ENCLOSURES IN GENERAL, e.g. DOORS, WINDOWS, BLINDS, GATES
- E06B9/00—Screening or protective devices for wall or similar openings, with or without operating or securing mechanisms; Closures of similar construction
- E06B9/24—Screens or other constructions affording protection against light, especially against sunshine; Similar screens for privacy or appearance; Slat blinds
- E06B2009/2464—Screens or other constructions affording protection against light, especially against sunshine; Similar screens for privacy or appearance; Slat blinds featuring transparency control by applying voltage, e.g. LCD, electrochromic panels
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour
- G02F1/15—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour based on an electrochromic effect
- G02F1/163—Operation of electrochromic cells, e.g. electrodeposition cells; Circuit arrangements therefor
Definitions
- PCT/US2021/057678 claims benefit of and priority to U.S. Provisional Application 63/109,306, filed November 3, 2020, titled “ACCOUNTING FOR DEVICES IN A FACILITY” and U.S.
- PCT/US2021/057678 is a continuation-in-part of International PCT Application PCT/US21/27418, filed April 15, 2021, titled “INTERACTION BETWEEN AN ENCLOSURE AND ONE OR MORE OCCUPANTS;”
- PCT/US2021/057678 is also a continuation-in-part of International PCT Application PCT/US21/33544, filed May 21, 2021, titled “ENVIRONMENTAL ADJUSTMENT USING ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE;”
- PCT/US2021/057678 is also a continuation-in-part of International PCT Application PCT/US2021/030798, filed May 5, 2021, titled “DEVICE ENSEMBLES AND COEXISTENCE MANAGEMENT OF DEVICES;
- PCT/US2021/057678 is also a continuation-in-part of U.S.
- Patent Application Serial No.16/946,947 filed on July 13, 2020, titled “AUTOMATED COMMISSIONING OF CONTROLLERS IN A WINDOW NETWORK,” which is a national stage application under 35 U.S.C. ⁇ 371 to International PCT Application PCT/US2017/062634 (designating the United States), filed November 20, 2017, titled “AUTOMATED COMMISSIONING OF CONTROLLERS IN A WINDOW NETWORK;”
- International PCT Application PCT/US2017/062634 claims benefit of and priority to U.S. Provisional application 62/426,126, filed on November 23, 2016 and to U.S.
- PCT/US2021/057678 is also a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application Serial No.16/696,887 filed November 26, 2019, titled “SENSING SUN RADIATION,” which is a continuation of U.S. Patent Application Serial No.15/287,646, filed October 6, 2016 (now U.S. Patent Serial No.10,533,892) and titled “MULTI-SENSOR,” which is a continuation-in part of U.S.
- Patent Application 14/998,019 filed October 06, 2015 (now U.S. Patent 10,690,540), titled “MULTI- SENSOR HAVING A LIGHT DIFFUSING ELEMENT AROUND A PERIPHERY OF A RING OF PHOTOSENSORS;”
- PCT/US2021/057678 is also a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application Serial No.17/380,785 filed July 20, 2021, titled “WINDOW ANTENNAS,” which claims priority to U.S. Patent Application Serial No.16/099,424, filed November 6, 2018, titled “WINDOW ANTENNAS,” which is a national stage application under 35 U.S.C.
- PCT/US2021/057678 is also a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application Serial No.17/385,810, filed July 26, 2021, titled “WINDOW ANTENNAS,” which claims priority to U.S. Patent Application Serial No.16/099,424; PCT/US2021/057678 is also a continuation-in-part U.S. Patent Application Serial No.16/980,305, filed September 11, 2020, titled “WIRELESSLY POWERED AND POWERING ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS,” which is a national stage application under 35 U.S.C.
- Provisional Patent Application No.62/745,920 filed on October 15, 2018 and titled “CONTROL METHODS AND SYSTEMS USING EXTERNAL 3D MODELING AND NEURAL NETWORKS,” and to U.S. Provisional Patent Application No.62/805,841 filed on February 14,2019 and titled “CONTROL METHODS AND SYSTEMS USING EXTERNAL 3D MODELING AND NEURAL NETWORKS;”
- International PCT application PCT/US2019/046524 is also a continuation-in-part of International PCT application PCT/US2019/023268, filed on March 20, 2019 and titled “CONTROL METHODS AND SYSTEMS USING EXTERNAL 3D MODELING AND SCHEDULE-BASED,” which claims benefit of and priority to U.S.
- International PCT application PCT/US2019/023268 is a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application No.16/013,770, filed on June 20, 2018 and titled “CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS,” which is a continuation of U.S.
- Patent Application 15/347,677 titled “CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS” and filed on November 9, 2016;
- U.S. Patent Application 15/347,677 is a continuation-in-part of International PCT application PCT/US15/29675 filed on May 7, 2015 and titled “CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS,” which claims benefit and priority to 61/991,375 filed on May 9, 2014 and titled “CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS;”
- U.S. Patent Application 15/347,677 is also a continuation-in-part of U.S.
- Patent Application 13/772,969 filed on February 21, 2013 and titled “CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS;”
- International PCT application PCT/US2019/046524 is also a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application No.16/438,177, titled “APPLICATIONS FOR CONTROLLING OPTICALLY SWITCHABLE DEVICES” and filed on June 11, 2019, which is a continuation of U.S. Patent Application No.14/391,122, filed on October 7, 2014 and titled “APPLICATIONS FOR CONTROLLING OPTICALLY SWITCHABLE DEVICES;”
- U.S. Patent Application No.14/391,122 is a national stage application under 35 U.S.C.
- Patent Application 15/347,677 titled “CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS,” and filed on November 9, 2016, which is a continuation-in-part of International Patent Application PCT/US15/29675, titled, “CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS,” filed on May 7, 2015, which claims priority to and benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No.61/991,375, titled “CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS” and filed on May 9, 2014; U.S. Patent Application 15/347,677 is also a continuation-in-part of U.S.
- Patent Application No.13/772,969 titled “CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS” and filed on February 21, 2013; this application is related to U.S. Patent Application Serial No.17/400,596, titled “AUTOMATED COMMISSIONING OF CONTROLLERS IN A WINDOW NETWORK,” filed on August 12, 2021, which is a continuation of U.S. Patent Application 16/462,916, titled “AUTOMATED COMMISSIONING OF CONTROLLERS IN A WINDOW NETWORK,” and filed on May 21, 2019; U.S. Patent Application 16/462,916 is a continuation-in-part of U.S.
- U.S. Patent Application 14/951,410 is also a continuation-in-part of 13/449,248, filed on April 17, 2012; this application is related to U.S. Patent Application 18/100,773, titled “AUTOMATED COMMISSIONING OF CONTROLLERS IN A WINDOW NETWORK,” and filed on January 24, 2023, which is a continuation of U.S.
- Patent Application Serial No.16/946,947 filed on July 13, 2020, titled “AUTOMATED COMMISSIONING OF CONTROLLERS IN A WINDOW NETWORK,” which is a national stage application under 35 U.S.C. ⁇ 371 to International PCT Application PCT/US2017/062634 (designating the United States), filed November 20, 2017, titled “AUTOMATED COMMISSIONING OF CONTROLLERS IN A WINDOW NETWORK;”
- International PCT Application PCT/US2017/062634 claims benefit of and priority to U.S. Provisional application 62/426,126, filed on November 23, 2016 and to U.S.
- Patent Application 15/762,077 titled “METHODS OF CONTROLLING MULTI-ZONE TINTABLE WINDOWS” and filed on March 21, 2018, which is a national stage application under 35 U.S.C. ⁇ 371 to International PCT Application PCT/US2016/055005, filed on September 30, 2016, titled “METHODS OF CONTROLLING MULTI-ZONE TINTABLE WINDOWS;”
- International PCT Application PCT/US2016/055005 is a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application 15/094897, filed on April 18, 2016; International PCT Application PCT/US2016/055005 claims benefit of and priority to U.S. Provisional 62/236,032, filed on October 1, 2015; U.S.
- Patent Application 14/137,644 is a continuation-in-part of International PCT Application PCT/US2013/069913, filed on November 13, 2013; International PCT Application PCT/US2013/069913 claims benefit of and priority to U.S. Provisional Applications 61/740,651, filed on December 21, 2012 and 61/725,980, filed on November 13, 2012; 14/137,644 is a continuation-in-part of International PCT Application PCT/US2013/031098, filed on March 13, 2013; International PCT Application PCT/US2013/031098 claims benefit of and priority to U.S. Provisional Patent Application 61/610,241, filed on March 13, 2012; each of these applications is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety and for all purposes.
- Electrochromism is a phenomenon in which a material exhibits a reversible electrochemically-mediated change in an optical property when placed in a different electronic state, typically by being subjected to a voltage change.
- the optical property is typically one or more of color, transmittance, absorbance, and reflectance.
- One well known electrochromic material is tungsten oxide (WO 3 ).
- Tungsten oxide is a cathodic electrochromic material in which a coloration transition, transparent to blue, occurs by electrochemical reduction.
- Electrochromic materials may be incorporated into, for example, windows for residential, commercial, and other uses.
- electrochromic windows are windows that can be darkened or lightened electronically. A small voltage applied to an electrochromic device of the window will cause them to darken; reversing the voltage causes them to lighten. This capability allows control of the amount of light that passes through the windows, and presents an opportunity for electrochromic windows to be used as energy-saving devices.
- Embodiments pertain to a method controlling one or more tintable windows in a building.
- the method comprises determining one or more transmissivities of the one or more tintable windows.
- the one or more transmissivities determined to generate a target illuminance level, or approximately the target illuminance level, at one or more grid points in an internal space of a virtual representation of the building,
- the one or more transmissivities determined based at least in part on attenuated clear sky data that is based at least in part on a predicted clear sky illuminance and readings from a plurality of sensors.
- the method further comprising holding, or transitioning, the one or more tintable windows to an end tint state associated with the one or more determined transmissivities.
- Embodiments pertain to a method controlling one or more tintable windows in a building.
- the method comprises determining one or more transmissivities of one or more tintable windows in the building.
- the one or more transmissivities are determined based on attenuated clear sky data to generate a target illuminance level, or approximately the target illuminance level, in an internal space of a virtual representation of the building.
- the method further comprising forecasting an override tint value based on a statistical assessment of past override values.
- the method comprise holding, or transitioning, the one or more tintable windows to one or more end tint states associated with the one or more transmissivities determined or to the override tint value if an override is in place.
- Embodiments pertain to a method controlling one or more tintable windows in a building.
- the method comprises receiving a target level for an internal condition of the building using a virtual representation of the building.
- the target level comprises one or more of an illuminance level in an internal space of the building, a heat gain into the internal space of the building, or a color of light in the internal space of the building.
- the method further comprises determining one or more transmissivities of one or more tintable windows in the building, wherein the one or more transmissivities are determined to generate the target level, or approximately the target level in the building.
- the method comprises holding, or transitioning, the one or more tintable windows to an end tint state associated with the one or more transmissivities determined.
- Embodiments pertain to an apparatus for controlling tint of one or more tintable windows in a building, the apparatus comprising at least one controller configured to operatively couple to the one or more tintable windows, the at least one controller further configured to perform, or direct performance of, any one of the methods of controlling one or more tintable windows in a building.
- Embodiments pertain to a non-transitory computer readable medium storing computer executable instructions for controlling tint of one or more zones of tintable windows in a building, when read by one or more processors, cause the one or more processors to execute operations of any one of the methods of controlling one or more tintable windows in a building.
- Embodiments pertain to a system for controlling tint of one or more zones of tintable windows in a building, the system comprises a network configured to operatively couple to the one or more tintable windows and configured to perform any one of the methods of controlling one or more tintable windows in a building.
- FIG.1A is a schematic drawing of a cross-section of an electrochromic lite, according to implementations.
- FIG.1B is a schematic drawing of a cross-section of the electrochromic lite in FIG.1A.
- FIG.1C is a schematic drawing of a top down view of the electrochromic lite in FIG.1A.
- FIG.2A is a schematic drawing of a cross-section of an IGU with the electrochromic lite described in relation to FIGS.1A-1C, according to implementations.
- FIG.2B is a schematic drawing of a cross-section of an electrochromic device, described in relation to FIGS.1A-1C and a reinforcing pane laminated thereon, according to implementations.
- FIG.3A is a schematic drawing of a cross-section of an electrochromic device, according to implementations.
- FIG.3B is a schematic drawing of a cross-section of an electrochromic device in a bleached state, according to implementations.
- FIG.3C is a schematic drawing of a cross-section of an electrochromic device in a colored state, according to implementations.
- FIG.4 is a simplified block diagram of components of a window controller and components of a window controller system, according to implementations.
- FIG.5 is a schematic diagram of a control system for controlling tint of a plurality of tintable windows in a building, according to implementations.
- FIG.6 is a schematic diagram of a network system with a building management system (BMS), a plurality of distributed local window controllers (WCs), a plurality of network controllers (NCs), and a master controller (MC), according to implementations.
- BMS building management system
- WCs distributed local window controllers
- NCs network controllers
- MC master controller
- FIG.7 is a schematic diagram of a plurality of tintable windows grouped into zones, according to implementations.
- FIG.8 is a schematic diagram depicting a virtual building model and associated BIM file(s), according to implementations.
- FIG.9 shows an example embodiment of a control system in which a real, physical building includes a controller network for managing and controlling interactive network devices such as one or more tintable windows, according to implementations.
- FIG.10 is a schematic illustration of a flux-transfer path from the sky to a grid point in an interior space such as a room of a building simulated by a three-phase simulation model, according to an implementation.
- FIG.11 is a schematic illustration of a sky segment/patch (S ⁇ ) providing an illuminance (L ⁇ ) through an aperture of a tintable window in a room of a building to provide an illuminance level at a grid point (x) inside the room, according to an aspect.
- FIG.12A is a three dimensional illustration of a sky dome having a plurality of 145 light patches, according to implementations.
- FIG.12B is a 2D projection of the sky dome shown in FIG.12A.
- FIG.13A is an illustration of a 2D projection of the sky dome shown in FIG. 12A depicting illuminance values for light patches based on attenuated clear sky data, in an implementation.
- FIG.13B is an illustration of a 2D top view of a virtual building model used in conjunction with the sky dome to illustrate illuminance levels within the interior of the building, in an implementation.
- FIG.13C is a bar chart of illuminance levels in various spaces of the virtual building model, in an implementation.
- FIG.14A is a drawing of an isometric view of a portion of a multi-sensor device having a plurality of photosensors equally distributed along the circumference, a photosensor pointed upward vertically, and two infrared sensors pointed upward vertically, according to an implementation.
- FIG.14B is a schematic drawing of a cross sectional view of a portion of a multi-sensor device having two rings of photosensors and a photosensor pointed upward vertically, according to an implementation.
- FIG.15 is an isometric view of an example of a multi-sensor device with photosensors directed at various azimuthal and altitudinal angles of the sky, according to an implementation.
- FIG.16A is plot of photosensor readings from thirteen (13) photosensors of multi-sensor device shown in FIG.14A on a clear sky day on February 16, 2022 in Milpitas California.
- FIG.16B is plot of photosensor readings from thirteen (13) photosensors of multi-sensor device shown in FIG.14A on an overcast morning and clear afternoon on April 11, 2022 in Milpitas California.
- FIG.17 is a diagram depicting operations of a method of generating one or more zones of tintable windows and associated orientations of the tintable windows, according to an implementation.
- FIG.18 is an illustration of an example of a system in which a virtual building model is used to present a 2D or a 3D model of virtual spaces in a building to a customer based on building information in files (e.g., BIM files) of the virtual building model, according to an implementation.
- files e.g., BIM files
- FIG.19 is schematic diagram of a system for controlling tint of one or more tintable windows, according to an implementation.
- FIG.20 is a flowchart depicting operations of a method of controlling one or more tintable windows in a facility such as a building, according to various aspects.
- FIG.21 is a flowchart depicting operations of an optimization process, according to various aspects.
- tintable window refers to a window (e.g., an architectural window) comprising one or more optically switchable devices (e.g., electrochromic devices).
- An example of a tintable window is an electrochromic window having one or more tintable devices.
- a tintable window is sometimes referred to as an “insulated glass unit” or “IGU.”
- a tintable window may include one or more electrochromic devices in some aspects, and in addition or alternatively, include one or more other optically switchable devices in other aspects.
- FIG.1A is a cross- sectional representation (see section cut X’-X’ of FIG.1C) of an electrochromic lite 100, which is fabricated starting with a glass sheet 105.
- FIG.1B shows an end view (see viewing perspective Y-Y’ of FIG.1C) of electrochromic lite 100, and
- FIG.1C shows a top-down view of electrochromic lite 100.
- FIG.1A shows the electrochromic lite after fabrication on glass sheet 105, edge deleted to produce area 140, around the perimeter of the lite.
- the electrochromic lite has also been laser scribed and bus bars have been attached.
- a bus bar (also busbar) is a metallic strip or bar for distributing current.
- the glass lite 105 has a diffusion barrier 110, and a first transparent conducting oxide layer (TCO) 115, on the diffusion barrier.
- TCO transparent conducting oxide layer
- the edge deletion process removes both TCO 115 and diffusion barrier 110, but in other embodiments only the TCO is removed, leaving the diffusion barrier intact.
- the TCO 115 is the first of two conductive layers used to form the electrodes of the electrochromic device fabricated on the glass sheet.
- the glass sheet includes underlying glass and the diffusion barrier layer.
- the diffusion barrier is formed, and then the first TCO, an electrochromic stack 125, (e.g., having electrochromic, ion conductor, and counter electrode layers), and a second TCO 130, are formed.
- the electrochromic device electrochromic stack and second TCO
- the first TCO layer is also formed using the integrated deposition system where the glass sheet does not leave the integrated deposition system during deposition of the electrochromic stack and the (second) TCO layer.
- all the layers are deposited in the integrated deposition system where the glass sheet does not leave the integrated deposition system during deposition.
- an isolation trench 120 is cut through TCO 115 and diffusion barrier 110.
- Trench 120 is made in contemplation of electrically isolating an area of TCO 115 that will reside under bus bar 1 after fabrication is complete (see FIG.1A). This is done to avoid charge buildup and coloration of the electrochromic device under the bus bar, which can be undesirable.
- edge deletion processes and additional laser scribing are performed.
- FIG.1A depicts areas 140 where the device has been removed, in this example, from a perimeter region surrounding laser scribe trenches 150, 155, 160, and 165.
- Trenches 150, 160 and 165 pass through the electrochromic stack and also through the first TCO and diffusion barrier.
- Trench 155 passes through second TCO 130 and the electrochromic stack, but not the first TCO 115.
- Laser scribe trenches 150, 155, 160, and 165 are made to isolate portions of the electrochromic device, 135, 145, 170, and 175, which were potentially damaged during edge deletion processes from the operable electrochromic device.
- laser scribe trenches 150, 160, and 165 pass through the first TCO to aid in isolation of the device (laser scribe trench 155 does not pass through the first TCO, otherwise it would cut off bus bar 2’s electrical communication with the first TCO and thus the electrochromic stack).
- the laser or lasers used for the laser scribe processes are typically, but not necessarily, pulse-type lasers, for example, diode-pumped solid-state lasers.
- the laser scribe processes can be performed using a suitable laser from IPG Photonics (of Oxford, Massachusetts), or from Ekspla (of Vilnius, Lithuania). Scribing can also be performed mechanically, for example, by a diamond tipped scribe.
- the laser scribing processes can be performed at different depths and/or performed in a single process whereby the laser cutting depth is varied, or not, during a continuous path around the perimeter of the electrochromic device.
- the edge deletion is performed to the depth of the first TCO.
- Non-penetrating bus bar 2 is applied to an area where the device was not deposited (e.g., from a mask protecting the first TCO from device deposition), in contact with the first TCO or, in this example, where an edge deletion process (e.g., laser ablation using an apparatus having an XY or XYZ galvanometer) was used to remove material down to the first TCO.
- both bus bar 1 and bus bar 2 are non-penetrating bus bars.
- a penetrating bus bar is one that is typically pressed into and through the electrochromic stack to make contact with the TCO at the bottom of the stack.
- a non-penetrating bus bar is one that does not penetrate into the electrochromic stack layers, but rather makes electrical and physical contact on the surface of a conductive layer, for example, a TCO.
- the TCO layers can be electrically connected using a non-traditional bus bar, for example, a bus bar fabricated with screen and lithography patterning methods.
- electrical communication is established with the device’s transparent conducting layers via silk screening (or using another patterning method) a conductive ink followed by heat curing or sintering the ink.
- Advantages to using the above described device configuration include simpler manufacturing, for example, and less laser scribing than conventional techniques which use penetrating bus bars.
- the device is integrated into an insulated glass unit (IGU), which includes, for example, wiring for the bus bars and the like.
- IGU insulated glass unit
- one or both of the bus bars are inside the finished IGU, however in one embodiment one bus bar is outside the seal of the IGU and one bus bar is inside the IGU.
- area 140 is used to make the seal with one face of the spacer used to form the IGU.
- the wires or other connection to the bus bars runs between the spacer and the glass.
- spacers are made of metal, e.g., stainless steel, which is conductive, it is desirable to take steps to avoid short circuiting due to electrical communication between the bus bar and connector thereto and the metal spacer.
- FIG.2A shows a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the electrochromic lite described in relation to FIGS.1A-1C integrated into an IGU 200.
- a spacer 205 is used to separate the electrochromic lite from a second lite 210.
- Second lite 210 in IGU 200 is a non-electrochromic lite, however, the embodiments disclosed herein are not so limited.
- lite 210 can have an electrochromic device thereon and/or one or more coatings such as low-E coatings and the like.
- Lite 201 can be laminated glass, such as depicted in FIG.2B (lite 201 is laminated to reinforcing pane 230, via resin 235). Between spacer 205 and the glass 201 of the electrochromic lite is a primary seal material 215. This primary seal material is also between spacer 205 and second glass lite 210. Around the perimeter of spacer 205 is a secondary seal 220. Bus bar wiring/leads traverse the seals for connection to a controller. Secondary seal 220 may be much thicker that depicted. These seals aid in keeping moisture out of an interior volume 225, of the IGU. They also serve to prevent argon or other gas in the interior of the IGU from escaping.
- FIG.3A schematically depicts an electrochromic device 300, in cross-section.
- Electrochromic device 300 includes a substrate 302, a first conductive layer (CL) 304, an electrochromic layer (EC) 306, an ion conducting layer (IC) 308, a counter electrode layer (CE) 310, and a second conductive layer (CL) 314.
- Layers 304, 306, 308, 310, and 314 are collectively referred to as an electrochromic stack 320.
- a voltage source 316 operable to apply an electric potential across electrochromic stack 320 effects the transition of the electrochromic device from, for example, a bleached state to a colored state (depicted). The order of layers can be reversed with respect to the substrate.
- Electrochromic devices having distinct layers as described can be fabricated as all solid-state devices and/or all inorganic devices. Such devices and methods of fabricating them are described in more detail in U.S. Patent Application Serial Number 12/645,111, entitled “Fabrication of Low-Defectivity Electrochromic Devices,” filed on December 22, 2009, and naming Mark Kozlowski et al. as inventors, and in U.S. Patent Application Serial Number 12/645,159, entitled, “Electrochromic Devices,” filed on December 22, 2009 and naming Zhongchun Wang et al. as inventors, both of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties. It should be understood, however, that any one or more of the layers in the stack may contain some amount of organic material.
- liquids that may be present in one or more layers in small amounts.
- solid state material may be deposited or otherwise formed by processes employing liquid components such as certain processes employing sol-gels or chemical vapor deposition.
- the reference to a transition between a bleached state and colored state is non-limiting and suggests only one example, among many, of an electrochromic transition that may be implemented. Unless otherwise specified herein (including the foregoing discussion), whenever reference is made to a bleached-colored transition (or equivalently a clear-tinted transition), the corresponding device or process encompasses other optical state transitions such as non-reflective- reflective, transparent-opaque, etc.
- the term “bleached” or “clear” refers to an optically neutral state, for example, uncolored, transparent, or translucent. Still further, unless specified otherwise herein, the “color” or “tint” of an electrochromic transition is not limited to any particular wavelength or range of wavelengths. As understood by those of skill in the art, the choice of appropriate electrochromic and counter electrode materials governs the relevant optical transition. [0062] In embodiments described herein, the electrochromic device reversibly cycles between a bleached/clear state and a colored/tinted state. In some cases, when the device is in a bleached state, a potential is applied to the electrochromic stack 320 such that available ions in the stack reside primarily in the counter electrode 310.
- voltage source 316 may be configured to operate in conjunction with radiant and other environmental sensors. As described herein, voltage source 316 interfaces with a device controller (not shown in this figure).
- voltage source 316 may interface with an energy management system that controls the electrochromic device according to various criteria such as the time of year, time of day, and measured environmental conditions.
- an energy management system in conjunction with large area electrochromic devices (e.g., an electrochromic window), can dramatically lower the energy consumption of a building.
- Any material having suitable optical, electrical, thermal, and mechanical properties may be used as substrate 302.
- Such substrates include, for example, glass, plastic, and mirror materials.
- Suitable glasses include either clear or tinted soda lime glass, including soda lime float glass. The glass may be tempered or untempered.
- the substrate is a glass pane sized for residential window applications. The size of such glass pane can vary widely depending on the specific needs of the residence.
- the substrate is architectural glass.
- Architectural glass is typically used in commercial buildings, but may also be used in residential buildings, and typically, though not necessarily, separates an indoor environment from an outdoor environment.
- architectural glass is at least 20 inches by 20 inches, and can be much larger, for example, as large as about 80 inches by 120 inches.
- Architectural glass is typically at least about 2 mm thick, typically between about 3 mm and about 6 mm thick.
- electrochromic devices are scalable to substrates smaller or larger than architectural glass. Further, the electrochromic device may be provided on a mirror of any size and shape.
- conductive layer 304 On top of substrate 302 is conductive layer 304.
- one or both of the conductive layers 304 and 314 is inorganic and/or solid.
- Conductive layers 304 and 314 may be made from a number of different materials, including conductive oxides, thin metallic coatings, conductive metal nitrides, and composite conductors. Typically, conductive layers 304 and 314 are transparent at least in the range of wavelengths where electrochromism is exhibited by the electrochromic layer. Transparent conductive oxides include metal oxides and metal oxides doped with one or more metals. Examples of such metal oxides and doped metal oxides include indium oxide, indium tin oxide, doped indium oxide, tin oxide, doped tin oxide, zinc oxide, aluminum zinc oxide, doped zinc oxide, ruthenium oxide, doped ruthenium oxide and the like.
- TCO transparent conductive oxide
- Thin metallic coatings that are substantially transparent may also be used, as well as combinations of TCO’s and metallic coatings.
- commercially available substrates such as glass substrates contain a transparent conductive layer coating.
- Such products may be used for both substrate and conductive layer. Examples of such glasses include conductive layer coated glasses sold under the trademark TEC GlassTM by Pilkington, of Toledo, Ohio and SUNGATETM 300 and SUNGATETM 500 by PPG Industries of Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania.
- TEC GlassTM is a glass coated with a fluorinated tin oxide conductive layer.
- the same conductive layer is used for both conductive layers (i.e., conductive layers).
- different conductive materials are used for each conductive layer.
- TEC GlassTM is used for substrate (float glass) and conductive layer (fluorinated tin oxide) and indium tin oxide (ITO) is used for conductive layer.
- ITO indium tin oxide
- employing TEC GlassTM there is a sodium diffusion barrier between the glass substrate and TEC conductive layer.
- the function of the conductive layers is to spread an electric potential provided by voltage source 316 over surfaces of the electrochromic stack 320 to interior regions of the stack, with relatively little ohmic potential drop.
- electrochromic layer 306 is inorganic and/or solid.
- the electrochromic layer may contain any one or more of a number of different electrochromic materials, including metal oxides.
- Such metal oxides include tungsten oxide (WO 3 ), molybdenum oxide (MoO3), niobium oxide (Nb2O5), titanium oxide (TiO2), copper oxide (CuO), iridium oxide (Ir2O3), chromium oxide (Cr2O3), manganese oxide (Mn2O3), vanadium oxide (V2O5), nickel oxide (Ni2O3), cobalt oxide (Co2O3) and the like.
- electrochromic layer 306 transfers ions to and receives ions from counter electrode layer 310 to cause optical transitions.
- the colorization (or change in any optical property – e.g., absorbance, reflectance, and transmittance) of the electrochromic material is caused by reversible ion insertion into the material (e.g., intercalation) and a corresponding injection of a charge balancing electron.
- a charge balancing electron typically some fraction of the ions responsible for the optical transition is irreversibly bound up in the electrochromic material.
- Some or all of the irreversibly bound ions are used to compensate “blind charge” in the material.
- suitable ions include lithium ions (Li+) and hydrogen ions (H+) (that is, protons). In some cases, however, other ions will be suitable.
- lithium ions are used to produce the electrochromic phenomena. Intercalation of lithium ions into tungsten oxide (WO3-y (0 ⁇ y ⁇ ⁇ 0.3)) causes the tungsten oxide to change from transparent (bleached state) to blue (colored state).
- tungsten oxide WO3-y (0 ⁇ y ⁇ ⁇ 0.3)
- counter electrode layer 310 is inorganic and/or solid. The counter electrode layer may include one or more of a number of different materials that serve as a reservoir of ions when the electrochromic device is in the bleached state.
- suitable materials for the counter electrode complementary to WO3 include nickel oxide (NiO), nickel tungsten oxide (NiWO), nickel vanadium oxide, nickel chromium oxide, nickel aluminum oxide, nickel manganese oxide, nickel magnesium oxide, chromium oxide (Cr2O3), manganese oxide (MnO2), and Prussian blue.
- Ion conducting layer 308 serves as a medium through which ions are transported (in the manner of an electrolyte) when the electrochromic device transitions between the bleached state and the colored state.
- ion conducting layer 308 is highly conductive to the relevant ions for the electrochromic and the counter electrode layers, but has sufficiently low electron conductivity that negligible electron transfer takes place during normal operation.
- a thin ion conducting layer with high ionic conductivity permits fast ion conduction and hence fast switching for high performance electrochromic devices.
- the ion conducting layer 308 is inorganic and/or solid.
- suitable ion conducting layers include silicates, silicon oxides, tungsten oxides, tantalum oxides, niobium oxides, and borates. These materials may be doped with different dopants, including lithium.
- Lithium doped silicon oxides include lithium silicon-aluminum-oxide.
- the ion conducting layer includes a silicate-based structure.
- a silicon-aluminum-oxide (SiAlO) is used for the ion conducting layer 308.
- Electrochromic device 300 may include one or more additional layers (not shown), such as one or more passive layers. Passive layers used to improve certain optical properties may be included in electrochromic device 300. Passive layers for providing moisture or scratch resistance may also be included in electrochromic device 300. For example, the conductive layers may be treated with anti-reflective or protective oxide or nitride layers. Other passive layers may serve to hermetically seal electrochromic device 300.
- FIG.3B is a schematic cross-section of an electrochromic device in a bleached state (or transitioning to a bleached state).
- an electrochromic device 400 includes a tungsten oxide electrochromic layer (EC) 406 and a nickel-tungsten oxide counter electrode layer (CE) 410.
- Electrochromic device 400 also includes a substrate 402, a conductive layer (CL) 404, an ion conducting layer (IC) 408, and conductive layer (CL) 414.
- a power source 416 is configured to apply a potential and/or current to an electrochromic stack 420 through suitable connections (e.g., bus bars) to the conductive layers 404 and 414.
- the voltage source is configured to apply a potential of a few volts in order to drive a transition of the device from one optical state to another.
- the polarity of the potential as shown in FIG.3B is such that the ions (lithium ions in this example) primarily reside (as indicated by the dashed arrow) in nickel- tungsten oxide counter electrode layer 410 [0079]
- FIG.3C is a schematic cross-section of electrochromic device 400 shown in FIG.3B but in a colored state (or transitioning to a colored state). In FIG.3C, the polarity of voltage source 416 is reversed, so that the electrochromic layer is made more positive to accept additional lithium ions, and thereby transition to the colored state.
- Tungsten oxide electrochromic layer 406 is shown in the colored state.
- Nickel-tungsten oxide counter electrode 410 is also shown in the colored state. As explained, nickel-tungsten oxide becomes progressively more opaque as it gives up (deintercalates) lithium ions. In this example, there is a synergistic effect where the transition to colored states for both layers 406 and 410 are additive toward reducing the amount of light transmitted through the stack and substrate.
- an electrochromic device may include an electrochromic (EC) layer and a counter electrode (CE) layer separated by an ionically conductive (IC) layer that is highly conductive to ions and highly resistive to electrons.
- EC electrochromic
- CE counter electrode
- IC ionically conductive
- the ionically conductive layer allows the electrochromic and counter electrode layers to hold a charge and thereby maintain their bleached or colored states.
- the components form a stack which includes the ion conducting layer sandwiched between the electrochromic electrode layer and the counter electrode layer. The boundaries between these three stack components are defined by abrupt changes in composition and/or microstructure.
- the devices have three distinct layers with two abrupt interfaces.
- the counter electrode and electrochromic layers are formed immediately adjacent one another, sometimes in direct contact, without separately depositing an ionically conducting layer.
- electrochromic devices having an interfacial region rather than a distinct IC layer are employed. Such devices, and methods of fabricating them, are described in U.S. Patent No.8,300,298 and U.S. Patent Application Serial Number12/772, 075 filed on April 30, 2010, and U.S. Patent Applications Serial Numbers 12/814,277 and 12/814,279, filed on June 11, 2010 – each of the three patent applications and patent is entitled “Electrochromic Devices,” each names Zhongchun Wang et al.
- a window controller may be used to control tinting of a tintable window.
- a window controller in communication may be utilized to adjust the tint level, and associated transmissivity, of an electrochromic window.
- the window controller is able to transition the electrochromic window between multiple tint states (levels) including a bleached state and a colored state.
- a window controller is able to transition an electrochromic window to any one of four tint levels (including the bleached state and the colored state).
- a window controller is able to transition an electrochromic window to any one of four or more tint levels.
- an electrochromic window can include an electrochromic device (e.g., electrochromic device 400) on one lite of an IGU (e.g., IGU device 200) and another electrochromic device (e.g., electrochromic device 400) on the other lite of the IGU.
- an electrochromic device e.g., electrochromic device 400
- another electrochromic device e.g., electrochromic device 400
- the window controller is able to transition each electrochromic device between two states, a bleached state and a colored state
- the electrochromic window is able to attain four different states (tint levels), a colored state with both electrochromic devices being colored, a first intermediate state with one electrochromic device being colored, a second intermediate state with the other electrochromic device being colored, and a bleached state with both electrochromic devices being bleached.
- the window controller is able to transition an electrochromic window having an electrochromic device capable of transitioning between two or more tint levels.
- a window controller may be able to transition the electrochromic window to a bleached state, one or more intermediate levels, and a colored state.
- the window controller is able to transition an electrochromic window incorporating an electrochromic device between any number of tint levels between the bleached state and the colored state.
- Embodiments of methods and controllers for transitioning an electrochromic window to an intermediate tint level or levels are further described in U.S. Patent Number 8,254,013, naming Disha Mehtani et al. as inventors, titled “CONTROLLING TRANSITIONS IN OPTICALLY SWITCHABLE DEVICES,” which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
- a window controller can power one or more electrochromic devices in an electrochromic window. Typically, this function of the window controller is augmented with one or more other functions described in more detail below.
- Window controllers described herein are not limited to those that have the function of powering an electrochromic device to which it is associated for the purposes of control. That is, the power source for the electrochromic window may be separate from the window controller, where the controller has its own power source and directs application of power from the window power source to the window. However, it is convenient to include a power source with the window controller and to configure the controller to power the window directly, because it obviates the need for separate wiring for powering the electrochromic window. [0086] Further, the window controllers described in this section are described as standalone controllers which may be configured to control the functions of a single window or a plurality of electrochromic windows, without integration of the window controller into a building control network or a building management system (BMS).
- BMS building management system
- FIG.4 depicts a simplified block diagram of some components of a window controller 450 and other components of a window controller system of disclosed embodiments. More detail of components of window controllers can be found in U.S. Patent Application Serial numbers 13/449,248 and 13/449,251, both naming Stephen Brown as inventor, both titled “CONTROLLER FOR OPTICALLY-SWITCHABLE WINDOWS,” and both filed on April 17, 2012, and in U.S. Patent Serial Number 13/449,235, titled “CONTROLLING TRANSITIONS IN OPTICALLY SWITCHABLE DEVICES,” naming Stephen Brown et al.
- the illustrated components of the window controller 450 include a microprocessor 455 or other processor, a pulse width modulator 460, one or more input 465, and a computer readable medium 470 (e.g., memory) having a configuration file 475.
- Window controller 450 is in electronic communication with one or more electrochromic devices 400 in an electrochromic window through network 480 (wired or wireless) to send instructions to the one or more electrochromic devices 400.
- the window controller 450 may be a local window controller in communication through a network (wired or wireless) to a master window controller.
- window controller 450 can instruct the PWM 460, to apply a voltage and/or current to electrochromic window 502 to transition it to any one of four or more different tint levels.
- electrochromic window 502 can be transitioned to at least eight different tint levels described as: 0 (lightest), 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, and 35 (darkest). The tint levels may linearly correspond to visual transmittance values and solar heat gain coefficient (SHGC) values of light transmitted through the electrochromic window 502.
- SHGC solar heat gain coefficient
- the lightest tint level of 0 may correspond to an SHGC value of 0.80
- the tint level of 5 may correspond to an SHGC value of 0.70
- the tint level of 10 may correspond to an SHGC value of 0.60
- the tint level of 15 may correspond to an SHGC value of 0.50
- the tint level of 20 may correspond to an SHGC value of 0.40
- the tint level of 25 may correspond to an SHGC value of 0.30
- the tint level of 30 may correspond to an SHGC value of 0.20
- the tint level of 35 (darkest) may correspond to an SHGC value of 0.10.
- Window controller 450 or a master controller in communication with the window controller 450 may employ any one or more control logic components to determine a desired tint level based on signals from the exterior sensor 510 and/or other input.
- the window controller 450 can instruct the PWM 460 to apply a voltage and/or current to electrochromic window 502 to transition it to the desired tint level.
- control logic and other logic used to implement techniques described above can be implemented in the form of circuits, processors (including general purpose microprocessors, digital signal processors, application specific integrated circuits, programmable logic such as field-programmable gate arrays, etc.), computers, computer software, devices such as sensors, or combinations thereof.
- the code may be stored as a series of instructions, or commands on a computer or machine readable medium, such as a random-access memory (RAM), a read only memory (ROM), a programmable memory (EEPROM), a magnetic medium such as a hard-drive or a floppy disk, or an optical medium such as a CD-ROM.
- a computer or machine readable medium such as a random-access memory (RAM), a read only memory (ROM), a programmable memory (EEPROM), a magnetic medium such as a hard-drive or a floppy disk, or an optical medium such as a CD-ROM.
- RAM random-access memory
- ROM read only memory
- EEPROM programmable memory
- a magnetic medium such as a hard-drive or a floppy disk
- optical medium such as a CD-ROM.
- Any such computer or machine readable medium may reside on or within a single computational apparatus, and may be present on or within different computational apparatuses within a system or network.
- a controller may comprise a processing unit (e.g., CPU or GPU).
- a controller may receive an input (e.g., from at least one device or projected media).
- the controller may comprise circuitry, electrical wiring, optical wiring, socket, and/or outlet.
- a controller may receive an input and/or deliver an output.
- a controller may comprise multiple (e.g., sub-) controllers.
- An operation (e.g., as disclosed herein) may be performed by a single controller or by a plurality of controllers. At least two operations may be each preconformed by a different controller. At least two operations may be preconformed by the same controller.
- a device and/or media may be controlled by a single controller or by a plurality of controllers. At least two devices and/or media may be controlled by a different controller.
- the controller may be a part of a control system.
- the control system may comprise a master controller, floor (e.g., comprising network controller) controller, or a local controller.
- the local controller may be a target controller.
- the local controller may be a window controller (e.g., controlling a tintable window), enclosure controller, or component controller.
- the controller may be a part of a hierarchal control system.
- the hierarchal control system may comprise a main controller that directs one or more controllers, e.g., floor controllers, local controllers (e.g., window controllers), enclosure controllers, and/or component controllers.
- the target may comprise a device or a media.
- the device may comprise an electrochromic window, a sensor, an emitter, an antenna, a receiver, a transceiver, or an actuator.
- a controlled apparatus is a tintable window (e.g., an electrochromic window).
- a dynamic state of an electrochromic window is controlled by altering a voltage signal to an electrochromic device (ECD) used to provide tinting or coloring.
- ECD electrochromic device
- An electrochromic window can be manufactured, configured, or otherwise provided as an insulated glass unit (IGU). IGUs may serve as the fundamental constructs for holding electrochromic panes (also referred to as “lites”) when provided for installation in a building.
- An IGU lite or pane may be a single substrate or a multi-substrate construct, such as a laminate of two substrates.
- the controller may be implemented in an electronic device in various forms of digital computers such as a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a workstation, a personal digital assistant, a server, a blade server, a mainframe computer, and other appropriate computers.
- the electronic device may also represent various forms of mobile apparatuses such as personal digital assistant, a cellular telephone, a smart phone, a wearable device and other similar computing apparatuses.
- the parts shown herein, their connections and relationships, and their functions are only as examples, and not intended to limit implementations of the present disclosure as described and/or claimed herein.
- the controller is coupled to memory, such as a non- transitory computer-readable or machine-readable medium.
- the memory stores instructions for the controller to operate a ECD using methods disclosed herein.
- the controller comprises a processor.
- the memory as a non-transitory computer readable storage medium, may be used to store non-transitory software programs, non-transitory computer executable programs and modules, such as program instructions/modules corresponding to the method for controlling an ECD in the embodiments of the present disclosure.
- the processor executes the non-transitory software programs, instructions, and modules stored in the memory to execute various functional applications and data processing.
- the memory may include a storage program area and a storage data area, where the storage program area may store an operating system and at least one function required application program; and the storage data area may store data created by the use of the electronic device according to the disclosed methods.
- the memory may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-transitory memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, a flash memory device, or other non-transitory solid-state storage devices.
- the memory may optionally include memories remotely provided with respect to the processor, and these remote memories may be connected to the electronic device of the method for controller the ECD. Examples of the above network include but are not limited to the Internet, intranet, local area network, mobile communication network, and combinations thereof.
- FIG.5 is a schematic depiction of a control system 500 for controlling and driving a plurality of tintable windows 502 of a building 504. It may be employed to control the operation of one or more devices associated with a tintable window such as a window antenna.
- the system 500 can be adapted for use with facility (e.g., a building 504) comprising a commercial office building or a residential building.
- facility e.g., a building 504 comprising a commercial office building or a residential building.
- HVAC heating, ventilation, and air conditioning
- the system 500 also includes a building management system (BMS) 510.
- BMS 510 is a computer-based control system that can be installed in a building to monitor and control the building’s mechanical and electrical equipment such as HVAC systems, lighting systems, power systems, elevators, fire systems, and security systems.
- the BMS 510 can include hardware and associated firmware or software for maintaining conditions in the building 504 according to preferences set by the occupants or by a building manager or other administrator.
- the software can be based on, for example, internet protocols or open standards.
- a BMS can be used in large buildings where it functions to control the environment within the building.
- the BMS 510 may control lighting, temperature, carbon dioxide levels, and/or humidity within the building 504.
- the BMS 510 can turn on and off these various devices, e.g., according to rules and/or in response to conditions. Such rules and/or conditions may be selected and/or specified by a user (e.g., building manager and/or administrator).
- One function of the BMS 510 may be to maintain a comfortable environment for the occupants of the building 504, e.g., while minimizing heating and cooling energy losses and costs.
- the BMS 510 is configured not (e.g., only) to monitor and control, but also to optimize the synergy between various systems, for example, to conserve energy and lower building operation costs.
- the illustrated example also depicts clouds 503. [0101] Some embodiments are designed to function responsively or reactively based on feedback.
- the feedback control scheme may comprise measurements sensed through, for example, thermal, optical, or other sensors.
- the feedback control scheme may comprise input from an HVAC, interior lighting system, and/or an input from a user control. Examples of control system, methods of its use, and its related software, may be found in US Patent No.8,705,162, issued April 22, 2014, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. Some embodiments are utilized in existing structures, including commercial and/or residential structures, e.g., having traditional or conventional HVAC and/or interior lighting systems. Some embodiments are retrofitted for use in older facilities (e.g., residential homes).
- the system 500 includes network controllers (NCs) 512 configured to control a plurality of window controllers 514.
- NCs network controllers
- one network controller 512 may control at least tens, hundreds, or thousands of window controllers 514. Each window controller 514, in turn, may control and drive one or more electrochromic windows 502. In some embodiments, the network controller 512 can issue high level instructions such as the final tint state of a tintable window.
- the window controllers may receive these commands and directly control their associated windows, e.g., by applying electrical stimuli to appropriately drive tint state transitions and/or maintain tint states.
- the number and size of the tintable (e.g., electrochromic) windows 502 that each window controller 514 can drive may be generally limited by the voltage and/or current characteristics of the load on the window controller 514 controlling the respective electrochromic windows 502.
- the maximum window size that the window controller 514 can drive is limited by the voltage, current, and/or power requirements, to cause the requested optical transitions in the electrochromic window 502 within a requested time- frame.
- Such requirements are, in turn, a function of the surface area of the window.
- this relationship is nonlinear.
- the voltage, current, and/or power requirements can increase nonlinearly with the surface area of the electrochromic window 502.
- the relationship is nonlinear at least in part because the sheet resistance of the first and second conductive layers increases nonlinearly with distance across the length and width of the first or second conductive layers.
- FIG.5 shows an example of a master controller (MC) 511.
- the master controller 511 communicates and functions in conjunction with multiple network controllers 512, each of which network controllers 512 is capable of addressing a plurality of window controllers 514.
- the master controller 511 issues the high level instructions (such as the final tint states of the tintable windows) to the network controllers 512, and the network controllers 512 then communicate the instructions to the corresponding window controllers 514.
- FIG.5 shows an example of a hierarchical control system comprising the master controller, the network controllers, and the window controllers.
- the various electrochromic windows 502, antennas, and/or other target devices of the facility are (e.g., advantageously) grouped into zones or groups of zones (e.g., wherein each of which includes a subset of the electrochromic windows 502).
- each zone may correspond to a set of electrochromic windows 502 in a specific location or area of the facility that should be tinted (or otherwise transitioned) to the same or similar optical states, based at least in part on their location.
- each zone can correspond to the set of electrochromic windows 502 on a particular floor and on a particular one of the four faces.
- each network controller 512 can address one or more zones or groups of zones.
- the master controller 511 can issue a final tint state command for a particular zone or group of zones to a respective one or more of the network controllers 512.
- the final tint state command can include an abstract identification of each of the target zones.
- a distributed network of controllers is used to control one or more tintable windows.
- a network system may be operable to control a plurality of IGUs in accordance with some implementations.
- One primary function of the network system may be to control the optical states of the electrochromic devices (or other optically-switchable devices) within the IGUs.
- another function of the network system is to acquire status information (e.g., data) from the IGUs.
- the status information for a given IGU can include an identification of, or information about, a current tint state of the tintable device(s) within the IGU.
- the network system may be operable to acquire data from various sensors, such as temperature sensors, photosensors (referred to herein as light sensors), humidity sensors, air flow sensors, or occupancy sensors, antennas, whether integrated on or within the IGUs or located at various other positions in, on or around the building.
- At least one sensor may be configured (e.g., designed) to measure one or more environmental characteristics, for example, temperature, humidity, ambient noise, carbon dioxide, VOC, particulate matter, oxygen, and/or any other aspects of an environment (e.g., atmosphere thereof).
- the sensors may comprise electromagnetic sensors.
- the electromagnetic sensor may be configured to sense ultraviolet, visible, infrared, and/or radio wave radiation.
- the infrared radiation may be passive infrared radiation (e.g., black body radiation).
- the electromagnetic sensor may sense radio waves.
- the radio waves may comprise wide band, or ultra-wideband radio signals.
- the radio waves may comprise pulse radio waves.
- the radio waves may comprise radio waves utilized in communication.
- the radio waves may be at a medium frequency of at least about 300 kilohertz (KHz), 500 KHz, 800 KHz, 1000 KHz, 1500 KHz, 2000 KHz, or 2500 KHz.
- the radio waves may be at a medium frequency of at most about 500 KHz, 800 KHz, 1000 KHz, 1500 KHz, 2000 KHz, 2500 KHz, or 3000 KHz.
- the radio waves may be at any frequency between the aforementioned frequency ranges (e.g., from about 300KHz to about 3000 KHz).
- the radio waves may be at a high frequency of at least about 3 megahertz (MHz), 5 MHz, 8 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, 20 MHz, or 25 MHz.
- the radio waves may be at a high frequency of at most about 5 MHz, 8 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, 20 MHz, 25 MHz, or 30 MHz.
- the radio waves may be at any frequency between the aforementioned frequency ranges (e.g., from about 3MHz to about 30 MHz).
- the radio waves may be at a very high frequency of at least about 30 Megahertz (MHz), 50 MHz, 80 MHz, 100 MHz, 150 MHz, 200 MHz, or 250 MHz.
- the radio waves may be at a very high frequency of at most about 50 MHz, 80 MHz, 100 MHz, 150 MHz, 200 MHz, 250 MHz, or 300 MHz.
- the radio waves may be at any frequency between the aforementioned frequency ranges (e.g., from about 30MHz to about 300 MHz).
- the radio waves may be at an ultra-high frequency of at least about 300 kilohertz (MHz), 500 MHz, 800 MHz, 1000 MHz, 1500 MHz, 2000 MHz, or 2500 MHz.
- the radio waves may be at an ultra-high frequency of at most about 500 MHz, 800 MHz, 1000 MHz, 1500 MHz, 2000 MHz, 2500 MHz, or 3000 MHz.
- the radio waves may be at any frequency between the aforementioned frequency ranges (e.g., from about 300MHz to about 3000 MHz).
- the radio waves may be at a super high frequency of at least about 3 gigahertz (GHz), 5 GHz, 8 GHz, 10 GHz, 15 GHz, 20 GHz, or 25 GHz.
- the radio waves may be at a super high frequency of at most about 5 GHz, 8 GHz, 10 GHz, 15 GHz, 20 GHz, 25 GHz, or 30 GHz.
- the radio waves may be at any frequency between the aforementioned frequency ranges (e.g., from about 3GHz to about 30 GHz).
- the network system may include any suitable number of distributed controllers having various capabilities or functions. In some embodiments, the functions and arrangements of the various controllers are defined hierarchically.
- FIG.6 shows an example of a network system 600 including a plurality of distributed local window controllers (WCs) 604, a plurality of network controllers (NCs) 606, and a master controller (MC) 608.
- the MC 608 can communicate with and control at least two, ten, tens, hundred, or hundreds of floors using network controllers 606.
- the floor controller may be configured to control a floor or a portion of a floor.
- the master controller MC 608 issues high level instructions to the NCs 606 over one or more wired and/or wireless communication links.
- the instructions can include, for example, tint commands for causing transitions in the optical states of the IGUs controlled by the respective NCs 606.
- Each NC 606 may, in turn, communicate with and control a number of window controllers 604 over one or more wired and/or wireless links.
- the communication links may be bidirectional communication links.
- Master controller 608 is also in communication with a database 620, and a building management system 624.
- the databased 620 and BMS 624 are in communication with an external source 610.
- external source 610 includes one or more sensors (e.g., a plurality of photosensors) and/or a cloud network.
- the MC 608 may issue communications including tint commands, status request commands, data (for example, sensor data) request commands or other instructions.
- the MC 608 issues such communications periodically, at certain predefined times of day (which may change based on the day of week or year), or based at least in part on the detection of particular events, conditions or combinations of events or conditions (for example, as determined by acquired sensor data or based at least in part on the receipt of a request initiated by a user and/or by an application or a combination of such sensor data and such a request).
- the MC 608 when the MC 608 determines to cause a tint state change (e.g., alteration) in a set of one or more IGUs, the MC 608 generates or selects a tint value corresponding to the requested tint state.
- the set of IGUs is associated with a first protocol identifier (ID) (for example, a Building Automation and Control (BAC) network identification (BACnet ID)).
- ID for example, a Building Automation and Control (BAC) network identification (BACnet ID)
- BAC Building Automation and Control
- the MC 608 may then generate and transmit a communication—referred to herein as a “primary tint command”— including the tint value and the first protocol ID over the link via a first communication protocol (for example, a BACnet compatible protocol).
- the MC 608 addresses the primary tint command to the particular NC 606 that controls the particular one or more WCs 604 that, in turn, control the set of IGUs to be transitioned.
- the NC 606 may receive the primary tint command including the tint value and the first protocol ID and map the first protocol ID to one or more second protocol IDs.
- each of the second protocol IDs identifies a corresponding one of the WCs 604.
- the NC 606 may subsequently transmit a secondary tint command including the tint value to each of the identified WCs 604 over the link via a second communication protocol.
- each of the WCs 604 that receives the secondary tint command selects a voltage and/or current profile from an internal memory based on the tint value to drive its respectively connected IGUs to a tint state consistent with the tint value.
- Each of the WCs 304 may then generate and provide voltage and/or current signals over the link to its respectively connected IGUs to apply the voltage or current profile.
- tintable windows may be arranged in a hierarchical structure. A hierarchical structure can help facilitate the control of tintable windows at a particular site by allowing rules or user control to be applied to various groupings of tintable windows or IGUs.
- IGUs are grouped into zones of tintable windows, each of which zones includes at least one window controller and its respective IGUs.
- Each zone of IGUs may be controlled by one or more respective NCs and one or more respective WCs controlled by these NCs.
- each zone can be controlled by a single NC and two or more WCs controlled by the single NC.
- at least one device is operated in coordination with at least one other device, which devices are coupled to the network.
- Control of the at least one device may be via Ethernet.
- a tint level of tintable windows may be adjusted concurrently.
- a zone of devices may have at least one characteristic that is the same.
- a zone of tintable windows may have its tint level (automatically) altered (e.g., darkened or lightened) to the same level.
- sounds sensors when they are in a zone, they may sample sound at the same frequency and/or at the same time window.
- a zone of devices may comprise a plurality of devices (e.g., of the same type).
- the zone may comprise (i) devices (e.g., tintable windows) facing a particular direction of an enclosure (e.g., facility), (ii) a plurality of devices disposed on a particular face (e.g., façade) of the enclosure, (iii) devices on a particular floor of a facility, (iv) devices in a particular type of room and/or activity (e.g., open space, office, conference room, lecture hall, corridor, reception hall, or cafeteria), (v) devices disposed on the same fixture (e.g., internal or external wall), and/or (vi) devices that are user defined (e.g., a group of tintable windows in a room or on a façade that are a subset of a larger group of tintable windows.
- devices e.g., tintable windows facing a particular direction of an enclosure (e.g., facility), (ii) a plurality of devices disposed on a particular face (e.g., façade) of the enclosure, (iii)
- the (automatic) adjustment of the devices may done automatically and/or by a user.
- the automatic changing of device properties and/or status in a zone may be overridden by a user (e.g., by manually adjusting the tint level).
- a user may override the automatic adjustment of the devices in a zone using mobile circuitry (e.g., a remote controller, a virtual reality controller, a cellular phone, an electronic notepad, a laptop computer and/or by a similar mobile device).
- mobile circuitry e.g., a remote controller, a virtual reality controller, a cellular phone, an electronic notepad, a laptop computer and/or by a similar mobile device.
- instructions relating to the control of a device e.g., instructions for a window controller or a tintable window
- they are accompanied with a unique network ID of the device they are sent to.
- Networks IDs may be helpful to ensure that instructions reach and are carried out on the intended device.
- a window controller that controls the tint states of more than one IGU may determine which IGU (tintable window) to control based upon a network ID such as a Controller Area Network (CAN) ID (a form of network ID) that is passed along with the tinting command.
- CAN Controller Area Network
- the term network ID includes but is not limited to CAN IDs, and BACnet IDs.
- Such network IDs may be applied to window network nodes such as window controllers, network controllers, and master controllers.
- a network ID for a device may include the network ID of every device that controls it in the hierarchical structure.
- the network ID of an IGU may include a window controller ID, a network controller ID, and a master controller ID in addition to its own CAN ID.
- FIG.7 shows various tintable windows (referred to as “IGUs”) 722 grouped into zones 703 of tintable windows.
- Each zone 703 includes at least one window controller 724 and one or more respective tintable windows 722.
- each zone of tintable windows 722 is controlled by one or more respective NCs and one or more respective WCs 724 controlled by these NCs.
- Each zone 703 may be controlled by a single NC and two or more WCs 724 controlled by the single NC.
- a zone 703 can represent a logical grouping of the tintable windows 722.
- each zone 703 may correspond to a set of one or more tintable windows 722 in a specific location or area of the building that are driven together based on their location or orientation.
- a site 701 that is a building having ten floors and four faces or sides: A North face, a South face, an East Face, and a West Face.
- each zone 703 may correspond to the set of one or more tintable windows 722 on a particular floor and on a particular one of the four faces.
- each zone 703 may correspond to a set of one or more tintable windows 722 that share one or more physical characteristics (for example, device parameters such as size or age).
- a zone 703 of tintable windows 722 is grouped based at least in part on one or more non-physical characteristics comprising a security designation or a business hierarchy (for example, tintable windows 722 bounding managers’ offices can be grouped in one or more zones while tintable windows 722 bounding non-managers’ offices can be grouped in one or more different zones).
- each NC can address all of the tintable windows 722 in each of one or more respective zones 703.
- the MC can issue a primary tint command to the NC that controls a target zone 703.
- the primary tint command can include an abstract identification of the target zone (hereinafter referred to as a “zone ID”).
- the zone ID can be a first protocol ID such as that just described in the example above.
- the NC may receive the primary tint command including the tint value and the zone ID and may map the zone ID to the d protocol IDs associated with the WCs 724 within the zone.
- the zone ID can be a higher level abstraction than the first protocol IDs. In such cases, the NC can first map the zone ID to one or more first protocol IDs, and subsequently map the first protocol IDs to the second protocol IDs.
- a master controller, network controller, and/or other controller responsible for tint decisions may utilize the network address of the window controller(s) connected to that specific window or set of windows.
- a function of commissioning may be used to provide correct assignment of window controller addresses and/or other identifying information to specific windows and window controllers, as well the physical locations of the windows and/or window controllers in buildings.
- a goal of commissioning is to correct mistakes and/or other problems made in installing tintable windows in the wrong locations or connecting cables to the wrong window controllers.
- a goal of commissioning is to provide semi- or fully automated installation.
- the commissioning process for a particular tintable window may involve associating an ID for a device (e.g., the tintable window and/or window-related component), with its corresponding local controller.
- the commissioning process may assign a building location, a relative location, and/or absolute location (e.g., latitude, longitude, and elevation) to the device (e.g., window or another component). Examples relating to commissioning and/or configuring a network of tintable windows can be found in U.S.
- tintable windows After a network of devices (e.g., one or more tintable windows) is physically installed, the network can be commissioned to correct any incorrect assignment of window controllers to the wrong tintable windows (sometimes referred to as “IGUs”) or building locations. In some embodiments, commissioning maps pairs or links individual devices (e.g., tintable windows) and their locations with associated controllers. II. Additional Introduction [0120] Some tintable windows can be electronically controlled.
- a “space” refers to a volume within a facility that may serve a specific purpose.
- a space may be virtual space in a virtual representation of a facility such as a virtual model (e.g., digital twin) or a physical space of the facility.
- the spaces in a facility may have identifiers associated with the purpose of the space.
- An example of an identifier of a space is “Conference room A”, “Conference Room B”, or “Marketing Open Office.”
- a “space type” refers to an attribute of a space that indicates a function of the space.
- Some examples of space types in an office building include circulation, private office, open office, kitchen, conference room, breakroom, restaurant, fitness center, and lobby.
- Some examples of space types in an airport building include circulation, gate, restaurant, vendor, office, lounge, and service area.
- Some examples of space types in a multi-family house building include living room, kitchen, bedroom, bathroom, hallway, lobby, lounge, gym/fitness room, and office.
- Real-time control, or near (approximate) real-time control, of one or more conditions at a facility such as a building may be desired by customers of the facility (e.g., tenants, other occupants, and/or customer support personnel for the facility).
- customers of the facility e.g., tenants, other occupants, and/or customer support personnel for the facility.
- an occupant spending time in a particular three-dimensional space of a building may desire real-time control of the light level (e.g., level of natural light and/or artificial light), color of light, heat load (gain), and/or other condition of their space.
- identification of a malfunctioning tintable window, sensor, or other device, a controller, and/or a connection of the controller to a particular device for maintenance, upgrade and/or replacement may be desired.
- Certain embodiments described herein control the amount of natural light in a space of a facility by adjusting transmissivity of the facility’s tintable windows based on clear sky illuminance values attenuated based on measured illuminance outside the facility.
- the transmissivity of the facility’s tintable windows can serve as an independent variable that is adjusted to modulate the amount of light that passes through such windows from outside the facility into the space. By adjusting the transmissivity, the target lux level, or an approximation close to this target, can be achieved.
- the transmissivity of the facility’s tintable windows serves as the adjustable variable (or adjustable “knob”) for tuning the amount of natural light passing from outside the facility, through the windows, and into the space.
- Some of these embodiments use illuminance levels outside the facility based at least in part on predicted light conditions (e.g., clear sky values) that are attenuated or adjusted based on sensor data from one or more sensors (e.g., photosensors) positioned outside the facility.
- the predicated clear sky data are attenuated with a scaling factor based on the measured sensor data; in some instances, this may be considered real-time external light with attenuated clear sky data.
- clear sky data may represent external illuminance under clear sky conditions at a facility’s location and this predicted illuminance may be adjusted to account for real-time measured light conditions around the facility provided by sensors at the site of the facility such as on the roof of the facility.
- the measured illuminance may be used to determine a scaling factor applied to the predicated clear sky data, and by attenuating the by attenuating the predicted, outside light conditions with the measured real-time measurements, accurate light conditions can be used to control and adjust natural light in the space of the facility.
- the predicted illuminance may indicate illuminance at the facility emanating or originating from a southern compass direction at a particular time (e.g., the sun is south of the facility), and none from the northern compass direction.
- the measured light data as generated by a plurality of sensors, such as photosensors, may indicate measured illuminance from the northern compass direction; this measured illuminance may be caused by a cloud or building reflecting light at the facility from the northern compass direction.
- these predicted light values are attenuated, or scaled, based on the measured light data, the resulting light conditions around the facility may indicate that light is radiating onto the building from both southern and northern directions.
- the transmissivity of the facility’s tintable windows can be optimized to control the resulting natural light in a space of the facility.
- the predicted and measured illuminance outside the facility is simulated by light patches of a virtual sky dome over the facility. The light patches represent a luminance distribution that is based on predicted clear sky data and measured illuminance from the plurality of sensors.
- the sky above the facility is discretized into a plurality of light patches that make up the sky dome and each light patch has an associated lux level that represents a source or contribution of illuminance.
- Each light patch may be based on the predicted values which are attenuated by a scaling factor determined from the measured lux data received from the plurality of sensors.
- sensor readings of measured light data from the one or more sensors are used to determine a scaling factor applied to the luminance values of the clear sky data for the light patches (luminous patches) of the sky dome; this may create a real-time sky dome with attenuated clear sky data.
- Some embodiments map the sensor readings and associated attenuated scaling factors to the patches of the sky dome.
- the measured light readings may be from 12 photosensors radially arranged around a central axis and oriented outward perpendicular to the central axis. Some of the embodiments provided herein may map the data generated by these 12 sensors to the patches in the sky dome.
- the transmissivity of a facility’s tintable windows may be used to adjust heat gain in a space of facility given the light conditions outside the facility (e.g., predicted light adjusted by measured light data) to create a target heat gain, or approximation close to the target heat gain, in the space.
- Virtual Building Model (e.g., Digital Twin)
- a digital model and associated file(s) may be associated with the facility and the devices.
- the digital model and its associated file(s) are referred to as a “virtual building model” of the facility.
- An example of virtual building model is a Building Information Model or “BIM”.
- BIM files for a BIM model include a Revit file, a Microdesk file such as a ModelStream file, an IMAGINiT file, an ATG USA file, or similar facility-related digital file.
- the virtual building model may have associated centralized files integrating all assets at the facility, which can aid occupants and customer support personnel responsible for the facility and/or control of one or more devices within the facility.
- the virtual building model can be stored in a cloud network accessible and/or updatable by the occupants and customer support personnel.
- a virtual building model may include the location and identifiers of the devices in the building and the current settings and status of the devices in the building.
- the virtual building model may also include user preferences such as, for example, preferred settings of one or more environmental conditions (e.g., amount of natural light in a space) and preferred settings for one or devices (e.g., transmissivity of a tintable window).
- the virtual building model of a facility may be updated to reflect real time, or substantially real time status and settings, of the devices at the facility, which can aid in deployment, maintenance, and control of the devices and environmental conditions at the facility.
- the virtual building model can also serve as an interactive tool for customers to control in real time, or substantially real time, the environmental conditions (e.g., amount of natural light or heat load) in their space and see visualizations of their changes to environmental conditions on a three-dimensional model of the building and/or see visualizations on the three-dimensional model of the building of how their changes will cause adjustments to settings of devices in the building.
- a virtual building model may facilitate management of control of devices at various levels.
- a virtual building model may be a BIM that is supplemented with device related information such as through an app (software application). For example, input from customers (e.g., through an app) may be fed into control of the facility using the virtual building mode.
- the virtual building model may offer a visual proofing tool prior to commissioning or for purposes of maintenance after commissioning.
- the virtual building model may also offer a virtual reality experience of the facility (including its assets such as devices) to a user of the software application.
- a three-dimensional (3D) architectural model may be used to initialize files (e.g., BIM files) of a virtual building model, to incorporate architectural elements of a facility.
- Ground truth validation e.g., from a field service engineer
- the virtual building model may be initialized prior to commissioning the devices at the facility.
- the initialized BIM files (such as, e.g., an Autodesk Revit file) incorporate architectural elements of a facility, but not the devices installed in the facility.
- the BIM files may be updated during commissioning and/or updated by the occupants and or customer support personnel.
- devices may be installed and differentiated from one another by the installer, e.g., by consulting an external label having an inscribed serial number, bar code, Quick Response (QR) code, radio frequency identification (RF ID), and/or other printed information.
- QR Quick Response
- RF ID radio frequency identification
- the process of locating and documenting the devices during and/or after the commissioning process may be entered into the virtual building model by automated and/or manual process.
- commissioning may be performed to provide or correct assignment of window controller addresses and/or other identifying information to specific windows and window controllers, as well the physical locations of the windows and/or window controllers in buildings.
- commissioning may be used to correct problems made in installing tintable windows in the wrong locations or the connecting of cables to the wrong window controllers.
- the commissioning process for a particular tintable window involve associating an identification (ID) for the window, or other window-related component, with a network address of its corresponding window controller.
- the process may (e.g., also) assign a building location and/or absolute location (e.g., latitude, longitude and/or elevation) to the window or other component.
- the tintable windows e.g., comprising electrochromic devices
- electronic ensembles e.g., containing various sensors, actuators, and/or communication interfaces
- associated controllers e.g., master controllers, network controllers, and/or other controllers, e.g., responsible for tint decisions
- one or more controllers may need to utilize the network address of the window controller(s) connected to specific windows or sets of windows.
- a function of commissioning may be to provide correct assignment of window controller addresses and/or other identifying information to specific windows and window controllers, as well the physical locations of the windows and/or window controllers in buildings.
- Another function of commissioning may be to correct the installation of windows at the wrong location or the connecting of cables to the wrong window controllers.
- the commissioning process for a particular window may involve associating an identification (ID) for the window, or other window-related component, with a network address of its corresponding window controller.
- the process may (e.g., also) assign a building location and/or absolute location (e.g., latitude, longitude and/or elevation) to the window or other component.
- a control system and/or control interface comprises, or is in communication with, a “virtual building model” of a facility such as a building.
- the virtual building model may comprise a representative model (e.g., a two- dimensional or three-dimensional virtual depiction) containing structural elements (e.g., walls and doors), building fixtures/furnishings, and one or more interactive target devices (e.g., tintable windows, sensors, emitters, and/or media displays).
- the virtual building model may reside on a server which is accessible via a graphical user interface, or which can be accessed using a virtual reality (VR) user interface.
- the VR interface may include an augmented reality (AR) aspect.
- the virtual building model may be utilized in connection with monitoring and servicing of the building infrastructure and/or in connection with controlling any interactive target devices, and in providing interactive input (e.g., preferences for one or more environmental settings) from, and feedback to, a customer.
- the new device When a new device is installed in the facility (e.g., in a room or space thereof) and is operatively coupled to the network, the new device may be detected (e.g., and included into the virtual building model).
- a virtual building model comprises a virtual three dimensional (3D) model of the facility.
- the facility may include static and/or dynamic elements.
- the static elements may include representations of a structural feature of the facility (e.g., fixtures) and the dynamic elements may include representations of an interactive device with a controllable feature.
- the 3D model may include visual elements.
- the visual elements may represent facility fixture(s).
- the fixture may comprise a wall, a floor, wall, door, shelf, a structural (e.g., walk-in) closet, a fixed lamp, electrical panel, elevator shaft, or a window.
- the fixtures may be affixed to the structure.
- the visual elements may represent non-fixture(s).
- the non-fixtures may comprise a person, a chair, a movable lamp, a table, a sofa, a movable closet, or a media projection.
- the non-fixtures may comprise mobile elements.
- the visual elements may represent facility features comprising a floor, wall, door, window, furniture, appliance, people, and/or interactive device(s)).
- the virtual building model may be similar to virtual worlds used in computer gaming and simulations, representing the environment of the real facility. Creation of a 3D model may include the analysis of a Building Information Modeling (BIM) model (e.g., an Autodesk Revit file), e.g., to derive a representation of (e.g., basic) fixed structures and movable items such as doors, windows, and elevators.
- BIM Building Information Modeling
- the virtual building model is defined at least in part by using one or more sensors (e.g., optical, acoustic, pressure, gas velocity, and/or distance measuring sensor(s)), to determine the layout of the real facility.
- Usage of sensor data can be used (e.g., exclusively) to model the environment of the enclosure.
- Usage of sensor data can be used in conjunction with a 3D model of the facility (e.g., (BIM model) to model and/or control the environment of the enclosure.
- the BIM model of the facility may be obtained before, during (e.g., in real time), and/or after the facility has been constructed.
- dynamic elements in a virtual building model include device settings.
- the device setting may comprise (e.g., existing and/or predetermined): tint values, temperature settings, and/or light switch settings.
- the device settings may comprise available actions in media displays. The available actions may comprise menu items or hotspots in displayed content.
- the virtual building model may include virtual representation of the device and/or of movable objects (e.g., chairs or doors), and/or occupants (actual images from a camera or from stored avatars).
- the dynamic elements can be devices that are newly plugged into the network, and/or disappear from the network (e.g., due to a malfunction or relocation).
- the virtual building model can reside in any circuitry (e.g., processor) operatively coupled to the network.
- the circuitry in which the digital circuitry resides may be in the facility, outside of the facility, and/or in the cloud.
- a two-way (e.g., bidirectional) link is maintained between the virtual building model and a real circuitry.
- the real circuitry may be part of the control system.
- the real circuitry may be included in the master controller, network controller, floor controller, local controller, or in any other node in a processing system (e.g., in the facility or outside of the facility).
- the two-way link can be used by the real circuitry to inform the virtual building model of changes in the dynamic and/or static elements so that the 3D representation of the enclosure can be updated, e.g., in real time or at a later (e.g., designated) time.
- the two-way link may be used by the virtual building model to inform the real circuitry of manipulative (e.g., control) actions entered by a user on a mobile circuitry.
- the mobile circuitry can be a remote controller (e.g., comprising a handheld pointer, manual input buttons, or touchscreen).
- FIG.8 depicts a visual representation of a virtual building model 800 which is based, at least in part, on a BIM (e.g., Revit) file 801.
- BIM e.g., Revit
- virtual building model 800 includes a 3D virtual construct which may be virtually navigated to view and interact with target devices using an interface device.
- the interface may be a mobile device such as a smartphone or a tablet computer.
- a virtual representation of the enclosure comprises a virtual augmented reality representation of the virtual building model displayed on the mobile device, wherein the virtual augmented reality representation includes virtual representations of at least some of the real target devices.
- the navigation within the virtual building model using a mobile device may be independent of the actual location of the mobile device, or may coincide with the movement of the mobile device within the real enclosure represented by the virtual building model.
- the mobile device may be operatively (e.g., communicatively) coupled to the network.
- the mobile device may register its present position in the real facility with a respective position in the virtual building model, e.g., using any geo-location technology.
- the geo-location anchors coupled to the network.
- a mobile device e.g., a smartphone, tablet, or handheld controller
- the mobile device may include geographic tracking capability (e.g., GPS, UWB, Bluetooth, and/or dead-reckoning) so that location coordinates of the mobile device can be transmitted to the virtual building model using any suitable network connection established by the user between the mobile device and the virtual building model.
- a network connection may at least partly include the transport links used by a hierarchical controller network within a facility.
- the network connection may be (e.g., entirely) separate from the controller network of the facility (e.g., using a wireless network such as a cellular network).
- the target device may be outfitted with an optically recognizable ID tag (e.g., sticker with a barcode or a Quick Response (QR) code). Interaction of the mobile device with the target device may be used to populate a virtual representation of the target device in the virtual building model, with a unique identification code and/or other information relating to the target device that is associated with the ID code (e.g., comprised in the ID tag).
- ID tag e.g., sticker with a barcode or a Quick Response (QR) code
- FIG.9 shows an example embodiment of a control system 900 in which a real, physical building 910 includes a controller network 920 for managing and controlling interactive network devices (e.g., one or more tintable windows).
- the controller network 920 includes one or more controllers such as, for example, one or more of a master controller comprising a processor, a network controller, and local controller.
- the structure and contents of building 910 are represented in a 3-D model virtual building model 930 as part of a modeling and/or simulation system executed to manage computing assets at the building 910 and/or control one or more environmental conditions at the building 910.
- the computing assets may be co-located with or remote from building 910 and/or the controller network 920.
- network link 940 is connecting controller network 920 with an interactive target device 912 (e.g., a tintable window such as an electrochromic window).
- Interactive target device 912 is represented as a virtual object 932 within virtual building model 930.
- a network link 940 in building 910 connects the controller network 920 with a plurality of network nodes including one or more network interactive target computing devices.
- network link 940 is connecting controller network 920 with an interactive target device 912.
- Interactive target device 912 is represented as a virtual object 932 within virtual building model 930.
- a network link 950 connects controller network 920 with virtual building model 930.
- a customer 914 is shown located in building 900 and in communication with a mobile device (e.g., handheld control unit) 916.
- Building 900 includes a physical space 918 associated with customer 914.
- Physical space 918 in the building 910 is represented by a virtual space 938 in virtual building model 930.
- physical tintable windows in physical space 918 are represented by virtual tintable windows in virtual building model 930.
- Mobile device 916 may include integrated scanning capability (e.g., a camera for capturing an image of a barcode or QR code), and/or may include, or be in communication with, an identification capture device (e.g., a handheld barcode scanner connected with mobile device 916, e.g., via a Bluetooth link).
- an identification capture device e.g., a handheld barcode scanner connected with mobile device 916, e.g., via a Bluetooth link.
- ID tags may be comprised of, for example, RFID, UWB, radiogenic, reflective, or absorptive materials to enable use of various scanning tools (e.g., identification capture devices).
- the code(s) or printed matter on an ID tag may comprise device type, electronic and/or material properties of the target device, serial number, types, identifiers of component parts, manufacturer, manufacturing date, and/or any other pertinent information.
- the virtual building model of a facility stored on a server e.g., server on a cloud network and/or within the facility
- the virtual building model is updated to show real-time or approximately real-time, adjustments to one or more devices (e.g., interactive target device 912 in FIG.9) in the facility.
- the virtual building model may be updated in real-time or approximately real-time, to model future behavior of the facility.
- a customer may interactively select an internal space in the virtual building model to adjust a preferred amount of light in the space.
- the customer preference of the preferred amount of light is communicated to the server and stored in the virtual building model in real-time, or approximately real-time.
- a visual representation of the future adjusted tint levels of the virtual windows that will meet the preferred condition, and/or the future illuminance levels of the internal spaces in the updated virtual building model may be provided in real time, or approximately real-time, to the customer to show future behavior of the facility.
- An example of a visual representation of future illuminance levels in virtual spaces of an updated virtual building model is shown in FIG.13B.
- tinting methods described herein include an iterative process (sometimes referred to as an “optimization process”) that is designed to create a target illuminance level or lux level of natural light and/or other internal conditions (e.g., color or light, heat gain, etc.) in one or more internal spaces of a building.
- an iterative process (sometimes referred to as an “optimization process”) that is designed to create a target illuminance level or lux level of natural light and/or other internal conditions (e.g., color or light, heat gain, etc.) in one or more internal spaces of a building.
- This optimization process iteratively adjusts (e.g., through one or more iterations), transmissivity level(s) of one or more tintable windows in a virtual building model until the illuminance level of natural light in the internal spaces reaches, or approximately reaches, the targeted level.
- the transmissivity level or levels of the one or more tintable windows in the virtual building model act as an adjustable knob (independent variable) that are adjusted to create the target level of natural light, or about the target level of light, in the one or more spaces given the external light from the sky on the building.
- the transmissivity required to create the desired target lux in the space the light from the sky outside the building being transmitted through the tintable windows into the internal space(s) is calculated.
- This external light transmitted into the building is calculated based on predicted clear sky data attenuated with sensor readings.
- the illuminance level in the internal spaces is calculated based on the flux transfer of external light from the sky, through the tintable windows, and into the internal spaces within the building according to the three-phase model described below.
- the external light from the sky is simulated by a virtual sky dome over the building.
- the sky dome is based on predicted clear sky data and measured light from one or more sensors such as from a plurality of photosensors in a multi-sensor device on a roof of the building.
- one or more aspects of the predicted clear sky data are adjusted based on the measured light data to provide an accurate, real-world approximation of the external light from the sky.
- the transmissivity level or levels from the optimization process is then used to determine a final tint state for the one or more tintable windows in the building.
- Three-phase Model A three-phase model of the light flux transfer from the sky, through the tintable windows, and into the interior of a building may be utilized to model transmission of light to the internal space of the building.
- the three-phase model may be included in a 3D model of the building or a virtual building model (e.g., digital twin) of the building.
- the three-phase model can be used to determine the illuminance or lux level at one or more grid points (with x, y, z coordinates) in the interior of the building.
- grid point or “point” generally refers to a virtual location expressed in three-dimensional coordinates (x, y, z) and directional vectors (x-direction, y-direction, z-direction).
- the three-phase model factors the flux-transfer path from the sky to the grid points into three segments associated with three independent flux transfer matrices: (i) the view “V” matrix – flux transfer between tintable window and grid point in the building, (ii) the transmission “T” matrix - flux transfer through the tintable window, and (iii) the daylight “D” matrix – flux transfer between the sky and the exterior of the tintable window.
- VTDS can be utilized to obtain the illuminance matrix “E” representing the illuminance or lux level at each grid point given the “S” matrix of luminance values corresponding to sky conditions at the geographic location of the building.
- the coefficients of the clear sky “S” matrix may be based on data output from a virtual sky dome model simulation (annual or single point in time) of the light distribution in the sky over the building.
- the coefficients of the “S” matrix correspond to luminance levels at clear sky conditions at multiple points in time (e.g., over a year) at a particular geographical location such as the geographical location of a facility.
- an “S” vector represents a vector of luminance levels corresponding to sky conditions at a single point in time at a particular geographical location.
- the “S” matrix may be calculated by adding multiple “S” vectors at different points in time.
- CIE International Commission on Illumination
- ASHRAE The American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers
- “S” matrix coefficients are obtained by discretization of the underlying sky dome model. Some examples of discretization schemes that can be used include Tregenza and Reinhart schemes.
- the coefficients of the clear sky “S” matrix may be based on data output from a virtual sky dome model simulation (annual or point in time) of the light distribution in the sky over the building.
- a sky “S” matrix includes coefficients based on predicted values corresponding to clear sky conditions and measured light data based on sensor readings. In one example, the measured light data is used to attenuate or adjust the predicated values.
- FIG.10 is a schematic illustration of a flux-transfer path from the sky 1001 to a grid point 1005 in an interior space 1020, e.g., a room, of a building simulated by a three- phase simulation model, according to an implementation.
- the three-phase model segments a flux-transfer path 1007 from sky “S” 1001 to a grid point 1005 in three phases: (i) a first flux transfer from the sky 1001 to the exterior of tintable window 1012, represented as a “D” daylight phase, (ii) a second flux transfer through tintable window 1012, represented as a “T” transmissivity phase, and (i) a third flux transfer from tintable window 1012 to a grid point 1005 in the interior space 1020, represented as a “V” view phase.
- Various software such as open-source RADIANCE, can be used to create the coefficients for the V, T, D and S matrices.
- Employing RADIANCE may require first converting a virtual building model (e.g., BIM file) into the file format expected by RADIANCE.
- HONEYBEE is an example of open-source software designed to convert BIM files into the appropriate format for input into RADIANCE.
- the V, T, and D matrices are developed using site geometry (e.g., location of a building) derived from, for example, the virtual building model (BIM file).
- a three-phase model may be generated by at least three operations including (1) tracing the path of light from points in an indoor space to the sky by a calculation of the flux-transfer matrices V, T, and D, (2) estimating the brightness of the sky by calculating an “S” sky vector from, e.g.
- a “S” sky vector can include illuminance levels at different locations of the sky above the building at a point in time simulation of a virtual sky dome.
- the illuminance values may include predicted luminance values (corresponding to clear sky conditions) attenuated based on measured luminance levels from a plurality of sensors. In some cases, the attenuation contribution to the predicted luminance values by the readings from each sensor of a plurality of sensors is scaled.
- a “V” view matrix representing a single tintable window may have dimensions of the number of analysis grid point by the number of incoming incidence-angles (as determined by discretization)
- a “T” transmissivity matrix representing a single tintable window may have dimensions of the number of outgoing incidence-angles by the number of incoming incidence-angles
- a “D” daylight matrix representing a single tintable window may have dimensions of the number of outgoing incidence-angles by the number of incoming incidence-angles.
- the “S” sky vector generally has dimensions of the number of discretized sky light patches in the virtual sky dome. Incidence-angle can refer to an angle which light travels “into” or “out of” at a particular flux-transfer plane.
- the illuminance (lux) contribution from each tintable window and/or a facade of the building to each grid point can be determined.
- the “V” view matrix specifies (by incidence-angle) the luminous flux transfer between light traveling from the facade or the tintable window to each member of a set of grid points.
- the “D” daylight matrix specifies the flux transfer from discretized patches of sky (e.g., simulated by corresponding patches of a light dome) to a facade or tintable window at different incidence-angles.
- FIG.11 is a schematic illustration of a sky light patch 1102 ( ⁇ S ⁇ ) of a virtual sky dome providing illuminance (L ⁇ ) through an aperture 1113 of a tintable window into a room 1120 and to a grid point 1105 at x coordinates, according to an aspect.
- the sky light patch 1102 (S ⁇ ) has an angular size, an illuminance (L ⁇ ), and a direction.
- the flux transfer E(x) ⁇ from sky light patch 1102 (S ⁇ ) to grid point 1105 (coordinates X(x,y,z)) is determined based on the three phase modeling of the flux transfer.
- a “sky dome” refers to a model that represents a luminance distribution from, for example, a celestial hemisphere (alternatively another shape) representing the sky over a facility such as a building.
- the luminance distribution represents light intensity at different areas or light patches of the sky.
- the luminance distribution can represent measured luminance values (e.g., from sensor readings) and/or simulated luminance values.
- a sky dome determines the illuminance distribution as a function of the geographical location of the building (e.g., longitude, latitude, meridian), time, and physically measured radiation data from, e.g., one or more sensors at the site of the building.
- the sky dome simulation also accounts for historic weather data. The simulated data from a sky dome can be utilized to generate annual and/or single point-in-time illuminance distributions.
- FIG.12A is an illustration of a sky dome 1210 having a plurality of 145 light patches 1120.
- the sky dome 1210 has the shape of a hemisphere and the light patches are solid angle segments of the hemisphere, each segment covering solid angles in azimuthal and altitudinal directions.
- patches 1220 cover azimuthal/altitude solid angles of 0 degrees to 6 degrees, 6 degrees to 18 degrees, 18 degrees to 30 degrees, 30 degrees to 42 degrees, 42 degrees to 54 degrees, 54 degrees to 66 degrees, 66 degrees to 78 degrees, and 78 degrees to 90 degrees.
- other solid angles may be covered by light patches.
- other light patch shapes, numbers of light patches, and/or shape of the sky dome may be used.
- solid angle rectangular segments of the hemisphere may be used.
- FIG.12B is an illustration of a 2D projection of the sky dome 1210 in FIG.12A.
- the 2D projection includes the light patch id number (1-145) for each light patch along with its azimuthal angle and altitude angle at the center or centroid of each light patch.
- a “S” sky vector and/or a “S” sky matrix may include coefficients based on data provided by the light patches of the sky dome.
- illuminance values at determined at intervals e.g., a 2 minute time interval, a 3 minute time interval, a five minute time interval, or a ten (10) minute time interval
- intervals e.g., a 2 minute time interval, a 3 minute time interval, a five minute time interval, or a ten (10) minute time interval
- the illumination values used to determine coefficients are determined based on (1) historical weather condition statistics, including direct and diffuse horizontal illuminance values and dew point, (2) clear sky illumination values, and/or (3) sensor readings.
- an illumination value for each light patch is calculated by uniformly sampling illumination values across the light patch.
- the sky dome generates the illuminance distribution based on clear sky data attenuated by sensor readings to reflect dynamic changes (obstructions and reflections) in the sky.
- Various software such as open source RADIANCE, may be used to generate clear sky data to initialize the illuminance values of the light patches of the sky dome.
- the clear sky data is calculated based on geographical location of the building (e.g., longitude, latitude, meridian) and time. Sensor data from one or more sensors may then be used to attenuate the clear sky data in the sky dome model to generate a real time sky dome model with real-time (or approximately real time) values based on attenuated clear sky data.
- Sensor data from one or more sensors may then be used to attenuate the clear sky data in the sky dome model to generate a real time sky dome model with real-time (or approximately real time) values based on attenuated clear sky data.
- sensor readings of measured light data from the one or more sensors are used to determine an attenuation scaling factor applied to the illuminance values of the clear sky data for the light patches of the sky dome. For instance, at a particular time interval, the clear sky contribution of a light patch may be 500,000 lux.
- an attenuation scaling factor of 0.70 or higher may be determined and the scaling factor is applied to the illuminance value of the light patch.
- the scaling factors are bound within a range such as, e.g., [0.2, 1], [0.5, 1]. Bounding the attenuation scaling factor to a range applies a conservative attenuation factor.
- the real-time sky dome with attenuated clear sky data and a three-dimensional model of the building e.g., a BIM file or a digital twin
- a three-dimensional model of the building e.g., a BIM file or a digital twin
- the real-time sky dome with attenuated clear sky data is used to determine an illuminance distribution of external light over the building and the individual contributions of its light patches.
- the real-time sky dome with attenuated clear sky data is based on clear sky data determined for a future time.
- the clear sky data may be for a future time taking into account the transition time of the tintable window.
- the clear sky data may be determined for a future time so that a voltage profile can be applied to the tintable window in advance of the future time by at least the transition time to allow the tintable window to transition to the new tint state by the future time.
- FIG.13A is an illustration of a 2D projection of the sky dome 1201 shown in FIG.12A depicting illuminance values for light patches based on attenuated clear sky data.
- the sky dome includes attenuated clear sky data (e.g., predicted clear sky data attenuated with real-time measured light data by using the measured light data as a scaling factor applied to the predicted clear sky data).
- the illuminance values for the light patches are illustrated by shading.
- a set of four light patches 1311 is shown to have positive illuminance values and the other light patches have zero illuminance values.
- FIG.13B is an illustration of a 2D top view of a virtual building model that is used in conjunction with the sky dome 1310 shown in FIG.13A.
- the illustration shows illuminance levels in the interior of the building caused by attenuated external light from the sky provided by the positive illuminance levels in the set of four light patches 1311 shown in FIG.13A.
- the illuminance from outside the building is shown extending into the building in the 2D, or x-y plane.
- the illuminance is based in the southern part of the hemisphere, the light is seen radiating into the building in a general north-south direction, and with a northern based vector.
- FIG.13B also exemplifies how the attenuated clear sky data may be positioned onto a virtual model of a building.
- the attenuated clear sky data can be used to project the light into the building internal spaces.
- FIG.13C is a bar chart of transmissivity levels for each of the tintable windows in the virtual building model. This set of transmissivities, in combination with the sky luminance values in FIG.13A produces the horizontal plane illuminances at different points in the space as seen in FIG.13B.
- the real-time sky dome may be used to generate annual and/or point-in-time daylight simulations to determine illuminance values at different locations (e.g., patch locations) of the sky above the building.
- An annual simulation of the sky dome can be used to populate the sky “S” matrix with illuminance values over a time period of a year.
- Point in time simulations of the sky dome can be used to populate the sky “S” vector with illuminance values at different locations of the sky above the building at a single time. For example, the illuminance values from the light patches are used to generate the components of the “S” sky vector.
- clear sky data for a sky dome model is attenuated with sensor data from readings taken by one or more sensors (e.g., one or more photosensors).
- the sensor data is based on readings from a plurality of photosensors.
- the sensor data may be based on readings from photosensors of a multi-sensor apparatus such as a multi-sensor apparatus located on a roof of the building (sometimes referred to herein as a “sky sensor”).
- a multi-sensor apparatus includes a plurality of photosensors (e.g., 8, 10, 12, etc.) horizontally oriented and equally distributed azimuthally along the circumference of a circular housing.
- these sensors may be considered radially arranged and equally spaced around a central. axis.
- a multi-sensor apparatus has twelve (12) photosensors pointed toward the horizon and equally distributed azimuthally along the circumference of a circular housing, one (1) photosensor pointed upward vertically, and two (2) infrared sensors pointed upward vertically.
- Some examples of multi-sensor apparatus can be found in, e.g., PCT application PCT/US2016/055709, titled “Multi-sensor,” filed on October 6, 2016, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
- FIG.14A is a drawing of an isometric view of a portion of a multi-sensor device having twelve (12) photosensors equally distributed along the circumference, 1 photosensor pointed upward vertically, and two infrared sensors pointed upward vertically, according to an implementation.
- the multi-sensor device 1400 generally includes a housing 1402, at least one light-diffusing element (or “diffuser”) 1404 and a cover housing (or “cover” or “lid”) 1406. As shown, in some implementations the housing 1402, the diffuser 1404 and the cover 1406 are rotationally symmetric about an imaginary axis 1410 that passes through a center of the multi-sensor device 1400.
- the multi-sensor device 1400 also includes multiple photosensors 1412.
- the photosensors 1412 are positioned annularly along a ring (for example, the ring can have a center coincident with the axis 1410 and can define a plane orthogonal to the axis 1410). In such implementations, the photosensors 1412 can more specifically be positioned equidistantly along a circumference of the ring. In some implementations, the multi-sensor device 1400 further includes at least one photosensor 1414 having an axis of orientation parallel with and in some instances directed along and concentric with the axis 1410.
- the multi-sensor device 1400 further includes a first infrared sensor 1415A and a second infrared sensor 1415B located on an upper portion of the multi-sensor device 1400 positioned behind a diffusor 1404.
- the first infrared sensor 1415A and second infrared sensor 1415B may or may not be visible to the human eye from outside the multi-sensor device 1400.
- Each of the infrared sensors 1415A, 1415B has an axis of orientation that is parallel with the axis 1410 and faces outward from the top portion of the multi-sensor device 1400 to measure temperature readings based on IR radiation captured from above the multi-sensor device 1400.
- the first infrared sensor 1415A is separated from the second infrared sensor 1415B by at least about one inch.
- the multi-sensor device 1400 is installed on the outside a building or other structure such that both the first infrared sensor 1415A and second infrared sensor 1415B are oriented toward the sky in an approximately vertical direction (e.g., direction of gravity vector). When directed vertically toward the sky, the first infrared sensor 1415A and the second infrared sensor 1415B can output sky temperature readings.
- the readings taken by the sensors of the multi-sensor device 1400 may be supplied to a building management system and/or to other buildings in the general vicinity.
- Communication may be established by a cellular communication circuit that also may be included in the multi-sensor 1400 according to a particular implementation.
- the multi- sensor device 1400 is installed outside a building or other structure with its axis 1410 oriented vertically upward.
- each of the first infrared sensor 1415A and the second infrared sensor 1415B is oriented vertically upward and the azimuthal orientation of the installed multi-sensor device 1400 is zero and has no impact on the temperature readings from the infrared sensors 1415A, 1415B reflecting the sky temperature above the building/structure.
- the azimuthal orientation of the multi-sensor device 1400 refers to the angle formed between a line directed due North from the installed multi-sensor 1400 and line along the axis 1410.
- FIG.14A Also shown in FIG.14A is a plurality of radially-extending arrows 1416. Each of the arrows 1416 represents an axis of orientation of a corresponding one of the photosensors 1412.
- Each of the photosensors 1412 is depicted in dotted line indicating that photosensor 1412 itself may or may not be visible to the naked human eye from the exterior of the multi-sensor device 1400 in all implementations (As described in more detail below, the photosensors 1412 are positioned behind a diffuser 1404).
- Each of the photosensors 1412 is oriented along a respective axis of orientation extending radially outward from the center of the ring (along the direction of a corresponding one of the arrows 1416).
- the angle of detection of each photosensor 1412 is symmetric about the axis of orientation of the light sensor defining a symmetric “viewing cone.”
- the angle of detection of each photosensor 1412 is approximately 180 degrees (implying an approximately hemispheric angle of detection).
- each of the photosensors 1412 has an angle of view (distinct from the angle of detection) that overlaps the angle of view of each of the two respective immediately adjacent neighboring photosensors 1412.
- the angle of view of the photosensors in multi-sensor device 1400 is the angle defining a viewing cone within which half of the power spectral density in the wavelengths of interest is captured by the light sensor. Generally, the angle of view is twice the angle from the axis of orientation to an outer surface of the viewing cone.
- each of the photosensors 1412 is the same as the other ones of the photosensors 1412, and thus, the angles of view of each of the photosensors 1412 are generally the same.
- the axially-directed photosensor 1414 is of the same type as the photosensors 1412.
- a multi-sensor apparatus may have a plurality of photosensors arranged at various azimuthal and altitudinal angles.
- a multi-sensor apparatus may have a plurality of rings of photosensors, each ring having a plurality of photosensors oriented at a particular altitudinal angle and distributed equally along the circumference at different azimuthal angles.
- a multi-sensor apparatus includes a first ring with a plurality of first photosensors (e.g.8, 10, 12, etc.) horizontally oriented, a second ring with a plurality of second photosensor at an altitudinal angle in a range of, e.g., 15 to 45 degrees, and a third ring with a plurality of third photosensor at an altitudinal angle in a range of, e.g., 45 to 75 degrees.
- the photosensors in each ring are distributed equally along the ring circumference.
- FIG.14B is a schematic drawing of a cross section of a portion of a multi-sensor device 1450 having a first ring 1460 of photosensors 1462, a second ring 1470 of photosensors 1472, and a photosensor 1482 oriented upward vertically along a center axis 1490, according to an implementation.
- the second ring 1470 has a smaller number of photosensors (e.g., 4, 6, 8, etc.) than the first ring 1460 (e.g., 8, 10, 12, etc.).
- the photosensors 1462, 1472 are oriented along an altitudinal angle, ⁇ .
- the photosensors 1472 of the second ring 1470 are oriented along an altitudinal angle, ⁇ , that is between 0 degrees and about 90 degrees.
- the photosensors 1462 of the first ring 1460 are oriented along an altitudinal angle, ⁇ , that is about 0 degrees.
- the photosensor 1482 is oriented along an altitudinal angle, ⁇ , that is about 90 degrees.
- FIG.15 is an isometric view of an example of a multi-sensor device 1500 with photosensors directed at various azimuthal and altitudinal angles of the sky, according to an implementation.
- Multi-sensor device 1500 includes a circular honeycomb-configured array 1501 of sensor modules 1520 within a hemispherical enclosure, according to an embodiment.
- Each sensor module 1520 includes a tube 1522 and one or more sensors (for simplicity, components within each tube are not shown).
- the circular honeycomb- configured array 1501 is segmented into a circumferential dimension of 24 modules and radial dimension of 4 modules, although other dimensions can be used.
- each of the tubes 1522 in the honeycomb array 1501 is aimed at a different region of the sky.
- the sensors of the multi-sensor device 1500 are photosensors (e.g., CMOS/CCD sensors).
- Multi-sensor device 1500 includes a shield 1530 (e.g., glass or other transparent material covering) provided over the entire face illustrated as directed upward) of the multi-sensor device 1500. Shield 1530 may protect the sensors from debris and/or moisture intrusion.
- FIG.16A is plot of photosensor readings from the thirteen (13) photosensors of multi-sensor device 1400 shown in FIG.14A on a clear sky day on February 16, 2022 in Milpitas California.
- FIG.16B is plot of photosensor readings from thirteen (13) photosensors of multi-sensor device 1400 shown in FIG.14A on an overcast morning and clear afternoon on April 11, 2022 in Milpitas California.
- Mapping sensors to light patches [0173]
- a method includes operations for mapping one or more sensors from, e.g., a multi-sensor device, to cardinal (azimuthal) directions.
- the method includes mapping one or more sensors to the patches of the virtual sky dome.
- the position, intrinsic field-of-view (FOV), and azimuthal and altitudinal orientations of each sensor may be used to determine the flux transfer coefficients from each sky dome patch to each sensor.
- FOV intrinsic field-of-view
- the readings from the one or more sensors can be mapped to the light patches of the sky dome using, for example, a discretization scheme (e.g., Tregenza scheme) such as shown in FIGS.12A and 12B.
- Tregenza scheme e.g., Tregenza scheme
- a method includes operations for mapping a plurality of sensors to cardinal (azimuthal) directions using an m x n dimensional data frame, where m is the number of daylight minutes, and n is the number of days for which photo sensor inputs, are utilized. As different latitudes correspond to different sun trajectories during different seasons, different sensor(s) (e.g., pointing in different directions) may be important at different times of day and/or season.
- Incorporating these differences can involve performing a data reduction technique (e.g., Principal Component Analysis) to compress time series information from x number of sensors into a one-dimensional vector capturing the y strongest radiation signals received from each cardinal direction.
- a data reduction technique e.g., Principal Component Analysis
- An example of operations for mapping sensors to cardinal directions can be found in PCT Application PCT/US19/46525, titled “CONTROL METHODS AND SYSTEMS USING EXTERNAL 3D MODELING AND NEURAL NETWORKS, filed on August 14, 2019, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
- a three-dimensional (3D) architectural model may be used to initialize files (e.g., BIM files) of virtual building model such as a digital twin, to incorporate architectural elements of a facility.
- Ground truth validation e.g., from a field service engineer
- the virtual building model may be initialized prior to commissioning the devices at the facility.
- the initialized BIM files (such as, e.g., an Autodesk Revit file) incorporate architectural elements of a facility, but not the devices (e.g., electrochromic devices of tintable windows) installed in the facility.
- the BIM files may be updated during commissioning and/or updated after commissioning by customers such as occupants or customer support personnel.
- the BIM files are updated during an optimization process in real-time, or approximately (about) real-time, by a customer.
- one or more virtual spaces of a virtual building model are categorized by space type (e.g., private office, open office, kitchen, conference room, breakroom, and lobby) and/or virtual tintable windows are grouped together in zones, e.g., associated with spaces and/or associated with their orientation.
- space type e.g., private office, open office, kitchen, conference room, breakroom, and lobby
- virtual tintable windows are grouped together in zones, e.g., associated with spaces and/or associated with their orientation.
- one or more tintable windows that are in locations and orientations that may allow light to be transmitted into a space may be grouped together in a zone.
- FIG.17 is a diagram depicting operations of a method of generating one or more zones of tintable windows and associated orientations of the tintable windows.
- all enclosures e.g., rooms
- this operation may be completed during a commissioning process, for example; this operation may also be completed independent of a commissioning process.
- This operation may include accessing information within the 3D model that indicates whether each room is associated with one or more tintable windows.
- the names of the enclosures are determined or the enclosures are given identifying names.
- the four enclosures are given the names of private office South, Private Office Southwest, Open Office 1, and conference room.
- the orientations of each of the tintable windows for the spaces are determined from the building information in the files of the digital file.
- the tintable windows associated with an enclosure are grouped into a zone and the zone associated with the space.
- the south- facing tintable windows and the east-facing tintable windows of the space identified as Open Office 1 are grouped together in a zone named “Open Office 1.”
- additional or alternative zones or groupings may be made, such as grouping each tintable window with the same orientation.
- the south facing tintable windows may be grouped together while the east facing tintable windows may be grouped in a separate or different group than the south-facing group.
- This grouping may enable the control of different zones or areas of tintable windows that bound a single space, for instance.
- each zone of tintable windows bounding at least a part of a space may have the transmissivity of its tintable windows controlled to create the desired natural light level in the space.
- Such zoning and control could account for different light levels outside of a space that is defined by exterior tintable windows at different compass orientations.
- the techniques may be able to adjust the transmissivity of a zone of south facing tintable windows to account light conditions and light passing through or affecting those tintable windows, while also independently adjusting the transmissivity of a zone of east facing tintable windows to account light conditions and light passing through or affecting those tintable windows, and together to create the desired natural lux in that space.
- zoning management can be found in International PCT Application PCT/US19/46524, titled “CONTROL METHODS AND SYSTEMS USING EXTERNAL 3D MODELING AND NEURAL NETWORKS,” and filed on August 14, 2019 and International PCT Application PCT/US19/23268, titled “CONTROL METHODS AN SYSTEMS USING EXTERNAL 3D MODELING AND SCHEDULE- BASED COMPUTING,” and filed on March 20, 2019, which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties.
- the optimization process includes a sequence of operations that minimize the distance (e.g., squared difference) between a desired illuminance level(s) and the calculated illuminance level(s) in one or more spaces of a virtual building model (e.g., digital twin) by iteratively adjusting the transmissivity level(s) of one or more (virtual) tintable windows in the virtual building model until (A) no further change to the transmissivity level(s) produces negative change in the distance (closer to the desired minima) below a certain value (e.g., -.001) or (B) no further change to the transmissivity level(s) produces a distance that falls below some threshold value.
- a virtual building model e.g., digital twin
- the transmissivity level or levels of one or more zones of tintable windows may be adjusted so that the distance between the desired illuminance level(s) and the calculated illuminance level(s) in one or more spaces of a virtual building model is below a certain value.
- Each zone includes one or more virtual tintable windows.
- the optimization process are described with respect to preferred illuminance levels (or lux levels) in the virtual building model, other customer preferences may be included in other implementations. In addition or alternatively, preferences from multiple customers can also be included in the optimization process. In one aspect, one or more weighting factors may be applied to the preferences.
- the tintable windows may be considered to tint instantaneously.
- the transition time, or tint delay, of the tintable window(s) may be factored into an optimization process.
- an optimization function that minimizes the difference between the i th desired illuminance level, pi, and the calculated illuminance level, fi(T), which is a function of transmissivity, T, of the one or more tintable windows is: Optimization function: argmin T d (f i (T), p i ) (Eqn.1) where: i is 1, 2, ..., k where k is the total number of desired light levels [0185]
- the optimization function can be written as Optimization function: argmin T (f i (T) - p i ) ⁇ 2 (Eqn.2) where: i is 1, 2, ..., k where k is the total number of desired light levels [0186]
- the tintable windows are considered to tint over a period of time
- control logic for implementing tinting methods includes a process, such as an iterative process (e.g., an optimization process), designed to create a target or desired illuminance level in one or more spaces of a virtual representation of a building based on external light from the sky simulated by a virtual sky dome and based on light flux from the sky to the one or more spaces according to a three phase model.
- an iterative process e.g., an optimization process
- the external light simulated by the virtual sky dome is based on predicted illuminance that is attenuated or scaled based on measured readings generated by sensors at the building.
- the transmissivity (optimized variable) of the one or more tintable windows e.g., vector with values between 0 and 1 that is used to multiple the “T” matrix
- the transmissivity (optimized variable) of the one or more tintable windows is iteratively adjusted while holding other parameters constant (e.g. the daylight “D” matrix and/or view “V” matrix) until so that the illuminance level in the one or more internal virtual spaces in the building reach, or approximately reach, the target illuminance level(s).
- the illuminance level at grid points in the one or more internal virtual spaces is determined using the “V” “T” “D” and “S” matrices of the three phase model of light flux.
- the three phase model of light flux represents external light from attenuated clear sky data passing through the one or more tintable windows in their current tint state, and into the internal space(s) in the building.
- the virtual sky dome determines an illuminance distribution of light patches from the sky above the building as a function of geographical location of the building (e.g., longitude, latitude, meridian), time, and physically measured radiation data from, e.g., one or more sensors at the site of the building.
- the simulated data from the sky dome can be utilized to generate annual and/or single point-in-time illuminance distributions.
- the illuminance values from light patches of the sky dome can be used to determine the coefficients for the “S” matrix or “S” vector.
- the attenuated clear sky data of the sky dome is calculated from predicted clear sky data attenuated by readings of measured data from one or more sensors (e.g., photosensors from a multi-sensor device on a roof of the building). Each sensor is mapped to one or more light patches of the sky dome to determine the contribution of measured external light from each sensor to the light patches.
- the “T” matrix may be multiplied by a vector with values between 0 and 1 representing the adjustments to transmissivities of one or more tintable windows in the building.
- the vector can be used as an independent variable that is iteratively adjusted until the illuminance level at the grid point is at, or approximately at, the target illuminance level.
- the “T” matrix may be multiplied by a vector representing adjustments to transmissivities of tintable windows on sides or facades of the building.
- a virtual building model may be used to facilitate receiving information associated with preferences for a space or building, such as desired amount of light in a space from a customer (e.g., an occupant such as a tenant of the building or a customer service manager (CSM)).
- the amount of light corresponds to an illuminance or lux level.
- the customer or customers may adjust the desired amount of light in the space based on a scale from, e.g., 0 to 1001 to 100, or other similar range.
- the low end of the scale may correspond to a level of light in the space that results from one or more tintable windows associated with the space being at their lowest level of transmissivity (e.g., about 0.5%, about 1%, or about 2%) and the high end of the scale may correspond to the level of light in the space that results from the one or more tintable windows being at their highest level of transmissivity (e.g., about 52% or about 75%).
- the low end of the scale corresponds to approximately 200 lux and the high end of the scale corresponds to 1400 lux.
- a scale of 1 to 100 refers to 0.5% to 52% transmissivity.
- the files (e.g., BIM file) of the virtual building model may be updated in real time, or approximately real-time, with the corresponding illuminance level through, for example, an app (software application).
- the virtual building model stored on a server on, e.g., a cloud network, and/or within the building may be updated in real-time, or approximately real-time, to include the customer preference for the amount of light and the tint state or tint states of one or more tintable windows may be adjusted to meet the desired amount of natural light using the optimization process.
- a virtual representation of the building and/or space may offer visual simulation and proofing of customer preferences and adjustments to the tint state(s) of the tintable windows that result.
- the virtual representation of the building and/or space display on an electronic device such as a computer may show the resulting illuminance level (associated with the customer preference of the amount of light) in the internal space or spaces of the building (e.g., as shown in FIG.13B) from the optimization process based on the simulated external light currently on the building from the virtual sky dome (e.g., as shown in FIG.13A).
- FIG.18 is an illustration of an example of a system 1800 in which a virtual building model 1830 may be used to present a 2D or a 3D virtual model of spaces in a building to a customer based on building information in files (e.g., BIM file) of the virtual building model 1830.
- System 1800 can be used to receive information associated with a target amount of light for a space in the building and update preferences in files of virtual building model 1830 stored on a server 1840 (e.g., a server on a cloud network) with a corresponding desired illuminance level for the space.
- the system 1800 includes a mobile device 1816 with a display 1820 and at least one application 1827.
- the 2D or 3D virtual model may be interactively navigated in conjunction with display 1820 of mobile device 1816.
- the at least one application 1827 is configured to perform rendering, navigation, updating, and identification functions in concert with the virtual building model 1830. Updating the files of the virtual building model may be done using at least one database in which the virtual building model may reside (e.g., in a memory). The database may be at the building, at another facility, or in the cloud.
- display 1820 includes a 2D virtual model 1822 of spaces in a building.
- a customer has selected a virtual space 1822 that is identified as an “Engineering Area” 1823 with a space type of “Open Office” 1824.
- the customer can then adjust the amount of light in the space 1822 using a slider bar 1825.
- the slider bar 1825 allows the customer to adjust the amount of light in the space 1822 on a scale of 1 to 100.
- the amount of light is set to 20, which corresponds to approximately 200 lux.
- the amount of light corresponds to an illuminance or lux level.
- the files of the virtual building model may be updated, e.g., in real time, with the preferred illuminance level corresponding to the amount of light selected by the customer.
- the techniques described herein may then determine a transmissivity or transmissivities of one or more tintable windows in the building that provide the illuminance level, or approximately the illuminance level, associated with the customer’s preferred amount of light in the space. In some cases, the optimization process takes less than 1 minute, less than 2 minutes, less than 3 minutes, etc.
- the display 1820 may then be updated to display the desired illuminance level of the space and/or tinted version of the one or more tintable windows. Instructions may then be sent to one or more window controllers to apply the voltage profiles that tint the one or more tintable windows according to the determined transmissivity or transmissivities.
- FIG.19 is schematic diagram of a system 1900 for controlling tint of one or more tintable windows, according to an implementation.
- the system 1900 includes a cloud network 1910 and a user interface 1920 configured to receive input from one or more customers.
- Cloud network 1910 is in electronic communication with the user interface 1920 to receive data input from the one or more customers, update the data, and provide updated data to the user interface.
- input from the one or more customers may be stored in real-time or approximately real-time, in the cloud network 1910, the files of the virtual building model updated, and visualizations of future behavior at the facility may provided on a 3D model on the user interface 1920 in real-time, or approximately real time.
- An example of input includes information regarding groupings of tintable windows into one or more zones.
- System 1900 includes a service 1930 including an intelligence service 1932 configured to perform one or more operations and a tint state manager 1934 configured to manage the tint state instructions received from intelligence service 1932 and forward final tint instructions to one or more window controllers.
- tint state manager 1934 may determine whether an override is in place and apply an override tint state if the override is in place.
- Intelligence service 1932 is in electronic communication with the cloud network 1910 to communication data, e.g., information in the files of the virtual building model and/or the sky matrix or sky vector coefficients. Intelligence service 1932 is configured to determine sensor readings, e.g., by receiving sensor readings stored on cloud network 1910. Alternatively, intelligence service 1932 may be in communication with one or more sensors via cloud network 1910 or via a communication network to receive sensor readings from one or more sensors.
- System 1900 also includes a site design system 1940 and a commissioning service 1950 in communication with the site design system 1940. Site design system 1940 may communicate information about the facility such as the latitude and longitude of the facility.
- commissioning service 1950 is configured to determine and output a clear sky matrix, and V, T, D, S matrix coefficients for each tintable window at the facility to the cloud network 1910.
- techniques described herein, such as the iterative process may incorporate preferred values of metrics in addition to illuminance may be used to determine the transmissivity of tintable windows. For example, preferences for amount of heat radiated into the space may be incorporated into the optimization process. In another example, preference for reduced energy consumption may factor into the optimization process.
- a tintable window may have discrete end tint states, such as 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, or more tint states.
- control logic of a tinting method determines an end tint state for each tintable window that is associated with the transmissivity determined by the optimization process and a window controller can transition the tintable window to the end tint state associated with the transmissivity determined by the optimization process.
- the control logic may determine the end tint state associated with one of the tint states of the tintable window by first rounding up (or rounding down) the transmissivity determined by the optimization process to the closest transmissivity corresponding to a tint state of the tintable window.
- tintable windows are configured to transition to a plurality of 4 tint states (T1- T4) with tint 1 (T1) being a clear state and tint 4 (T4) being the darkest state.
- T1 corresponds to a transmissivity through a tintable window of about 50% (+/- 10%
- T2 corresponds to a transmissivity through a tintable window in a range of about 25% to about 30% (+/- 10%
- T3 corresponds to a transmissivity through a tintable window of about 7% (+/- 10%
- T4 darkest tint state
- the control logic may round up (alternatively round down) the transmissivity determined by the optimization process to the closest transmissivity associated with one of the 4 tint states.
- tintable windows may be configured with four discrete tint states, this disclosure is not limited. For example, the disclosed examples also apply to tintable windows having 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or even more tint levels. As another example, one or more tintable windows may be configured to hold any transmissivity with a range of transmissivity levels, and is considered to have an “infinite” number of tint states.
- FIG.20 is a flowchart 2000 depicting operations of a method of controlling one or more tintable windows in a facility such as a building, according to various implementations.
- one or more of the operations may be implemented by at least one window controller (e.g., master window controller, network window controller, or local window controller) operatively coupled to the one or more tintable windows.
- window controller e.g., master window controller, network window controller, or local window controller
- the at least one window controller is also in electronic communication with a server (e.g., a server in the cloud) on which a virtual representation (e.g., digital twin) of the building resides.
- the server and/or the at least one window controller may be in communication with one or more sensors, e.g., via a building management system.
- one or more of the operations may be implemented by a BMS in operative communication with one or more window controllers operatively coupled to the one or more tintable windows and in electronic communication with a server on which a virtual representation of the building resides.
- one or more of the operations may be implemented by a server in the cloud on which the virtual representation of the building resides.
- a virtual building model such as a 3D model e.g., a digital twin of the building is updated based on one or more preferences or inputs provided which may be provided by one or more customers of the building such as, e.g., an occupant of the building, a building manager, or a customer service personnel, or that may be provided as a default or initial input.
- This input may be received as described herein, such as stored on a memory or input through an app or other program.
- the preferences include a target amount of light, such as the amount of natural light, for one or more internal spaces in the building.
- a target illuminance level is determined from the desired amount of light and the target illuminance level is updated in the files of the virtual representation stored on a server (e.g., a server in the cloud or in the building).
- a system e.g., system 1800 shown in FIG.18
- files e.g., BIM file
- the customer may then interactively navigate through 2D or 3D virtual spaces of the virtual building to select a space to input a preference such as the amount of light in the space.
- the customer may adjust the amount of light on a scale of 1 to 100 as described with respect to FIG.18.
- the low end of the scale may correspond to the highest transmissivity level of the tintable windows associated with the one or more internal spaces and the high end of the scale may correspond to the lowest transmissivity of the one or more tintable windows.
- the control logic may determine an illuminance level corresponding to the desired amount of light.
- the customer may input their preference on a mobile device with an application that is configured to perform rendering, navigation, updating, and/or identification functions in concert with the virtual representation.
- the preferences including the corresponding illuminance level are transmitted to the server on which the files of the virtual model of the building resides. Updating the files of the virtual representation may be done using at least one database in which the virtual building model may reside (e.g., in a memory).
- the database may be at the building, at another facility, or in the cloud.
- the files of the virtual building model may be updated in real-time, or approximately real-time, with the preferred illuminance level corresponding to the amount of light selected by the customer and/or one or more other preferences.
- multiple customers provide input of desired amounts of light for one or more spaces in the building. If the desired amounts of light are for the same space, an average, weighted average, or mean of the amounts of light may be calculated and the corresponding illuminance level for the space updated in the files of the virtual representation.
- the customers may be prioritized and weighting factors applied to their input based on the prioritization.
- the control logic determines a luminance distribution from light patches of a virtual sky dome.
- FIG.12A illustrates an example of a hemispheric sky dome 1201 with one hundred forty five (145) light patches 1210. Each light patch covers a first solid angle in the azimuthal direction and a second solid angle in the altitude direction.
- the luminance distribution represents light intensity at the light patches of the sky above the building.
- the sky dome determines the illuminance distribution as a function of the geographical location of the building (e.g., longitude, latitude, meridian), time, and physically measured radiation data from, e.g., one or more sensors at the site of the building.
- the simulated data from a sky dome can be utilized to generate annual and/or single point-in-time illuminance distributions. These illuminance distributions can be used to generate the “S” sky vector and/or “S” matrix for the three-phase model of light flux.
- the control logic uses the sky dome model to simulate an illuminance distribution based on clear sky data attenuated by sensor readings to reflect dynamic changes in the sky.
- Various software such as open source RADIANCE, may be used to generate clear sky data to initialize the illuminance values of the light patches of the sky dome.
- the clear sky data is calculated based on geographical location of the building (e.g., longitude, latitude, meridian) and time.
- Sensor data from one or more sensors may then be used to attenuate the initialized clear sky data in the sky dome model to generate a real time sky dome model with real-time, or approximately real time, values that reflect dynamic changes based on attenuated clear sky data.
- the readings used to attenuate the clear sky data may be from one or more sensors at the site of the building. For example, the readings may be received from one or more photosensors in a multi-sensor device 1400 in FIG.14A or multi- sensor device 1500 shown in FIG.15. In one aspect, the multi-sensor device is located on a roof of the building.
- sensor readings of measured light data from the one or more sensors are used to determine an attenuation scaling factor applied to the illuminance values of the clear sky data for the light patches of the sky dome.
- the clear sky contribution of a light patch may be 500,000 lux.
- an attenuation scaling factor of 0.70 or higher may be determined and the scaling factor is applied to the illuminance value of the light patch.
- a method includes operations for mapping one or more sensors from, e.g., a multi-sensor device, to cardinal (azimuthal) directions. In addition or alternatively, the method includes mapping one or more sensors to the patches of the virtual sky dome.
- the position, intrinsic field-of-view (FOV), and azimuthal and altitudinal orientations of each sensor may be used to determine the flux transfer coefficients from each sky dome patch to each sensor.
- the readings from the one or more sensors can be mapped to the light patches of the sky dome using, for example, a discretization scheme (e.g., Tregenza scheme) such as shown in FIGS.12A and 12B.
- a function e.g., a sigmoid function
- scaled value e.g., 0.5 to 1.0
- the illuminance distribution from the sky dome may also account for historic weather data.
- the clear sky data e.g., illuminance
- the files of the virtual sky dome may be stored on a server (e.g., a server on a cloud network. The sensor readings are communicated to the server and the files of the virtual sky dome model are updated, e.g., at intervals and/or at the initiation of the optimization process.
- the control logic uses the illuminance distribution from the sky dome to generate coefficients for the “S” sky matrix or “S” sky vector used in a three-phase model of light flux.
- the “S” sky vector and/or a “S” sky matrix may include coefficients based on data provided by the light patches of the sky dome.
- illuminance values at determined at intervals e.g., a 2 minute time interval, a 3 minute time interval, a five minute time interval, or a ten (10) minute time interval
- intervals e.g., a 2 minute time interval, a 3 minute time interval, a five minute time interval, or a ten (10) minute time interval
- the illumination values used to determine coefficients are determined based on (1) historical weather condition statistics, including direct and diffuse horizontal illuminance values and dew point, (2) clear sky illumination values, and/or (3) sensor readings.
- an illumination value for each light patch is calculated by uniformly sampling illumination values across the light patch.
- the control logic uses processes described herein to determine a level or levels of transmissivity of the one or more tintable windows of the building that provide the target illuminance level, or approximately the target illuminance level, at one or more spaces (or grid points in the spaces) of the virtual representation based on the simulated distribution of external light from the virtual sky dome and the three-phase model of light flux transfer.
- these grid points in the spaces may include a point on the floor of the space.
- the “T” matrix may be multiplied by a vector with values between 0 and 1 representing the adjustments to transmissivities of one or more tintable windows in the building.
- the vector can be used as an independent variable that is iteratively adjusted until the illuminance level at the grid point is at, or approximately at, the target illuminance level.
- the “T” matrix may be multiplied by a vector representing adjustments to transmissivities of tintable windows on sides or facades of the building.
- the transmissivity (optimized variable) of the one or more tintable windows is iteratively adjusted using the vector with values between 0 and 1 while the parameters of the other matrices (e.g., daylight “D” matrix, view “V” matrix, and/or “S” matrix) are held constant until the illuminance level at the one or more internal virtual spaces (grid points) in the building reach, or approximately reach, the target illuminance level(s).
- approximately reaching the illuminance level can refer to reaching an illuminance level of one of within about 1%, within about 2%, within about 3%, within about 4%, and within about 5%.
- the illuminance level at the one or more internal virtual spaces is determined using the “V” “T” “D” and “S” matrices of the three phase model of light flux.
- the multi-objective optimization operations minimize the distance function (squared difference) between the desired illuminance level(s) and the calculated illuminance levels at the grid points at the one or more spaces of the virtual building model.
- the control logic may determine the optimization function is at a minimum if the calculated distance function falls below some threshold.
- control logic may determine the optimization function is at a minimum if the gradient of the distance function (with respect to window transmissivity) falling below some threshold.
- the optimization process may use an optimization function to minimize the difference such as one of the optimization functions in Eqn.1 and Eqn.2 above.
- the optimization function that minimizes the difference between the i th desired illuminance level, p i , and the calculated illuminance level, f i (T), which is a function of transmissivity, T, of the one or more tintable windows is either Eqn.1 or the simplified version provided by Eqn.2.
- the optimization process may consider illuminance levels of all zones of a building constrained by tint transition rate and associated voltage ramp and the current transmissivity of the one or more tintable windows, and the time until the next tinting opportunity (e.g., next time interval of an optimization process). In some cases, the optimization process takes less than 1 minute, less than 2 minutes, less than 3 minutes, etc. In one aspect, once the optimization process is complete, the interactive display of the virtual building model is updated to display the desired illuminance level of the space and/or the tinted version of the one or more tintable windows associated with the transmissivity determined by the optimization process.
- FIG.21 includes a flowchart depicting an example of operations of an optimization process, according to implementations.
- the operations illustrated in FIG.21 may be, e.g., sub-operations of operation 2040 of the method depicted in flowchart 2000 shown in FIG.20, according to an implementation.
- the control logic calculates an illuminance level (e.g., fi(T)) at a grid point (or grid points) in each three dimensional space of the one or more internal spaces of the virtual representation of the building.
- an illuminance level e.g., fi(T)
- the matrix equation E VTDS can be utilized to obtain the illuminance matrix “E” representing the illuminance or lux level at each grid point given the “S” matrix of luminance values corresponding to sky conditions at the geographic location of the building.
- the coefficients of the clear sky “S” matrix may be based on data output from a virtual sky dome model simulation (annual or single point in time) of the light distribution in the sky over the building.
- the coefficients of the “S” matrix correspond to luminance levels at clear sky conditions at multiple points in time (e.g., over a year) at a particular geographical location such as the geographical location of a facility.
- an “S” vector represents a vector of luminance levels corresponding to sky conditions at a single point in time at a particular geographical location.
- the “S” matrix may be calculated by adding multiple “S” vectors at different points in time.
- the “V” view matrix specifies (by angle) the light flux transfer between light traveling from the one or more tintable windows to the grid point in the space.
- the “D” daylight matrix specifies the flux transfer from the sky to the aperture(s) of the one or more tintable windows and can be calculated based on the dimensions and orientations of the tintable windows.
- the “T” matrix specifies the current transmissivities of the one or more tintable windows.
- the illuminance level at the grid point of each of the one or more virtual spaces is determined based on the current levels of transmissivity of the tintable windows.
- the multi-objective optimization operations minimize the distance function (squared difference) between the desired illuminance level(s) and the calculated illuminance levels at the grid points at the one or more spaces of the virtual building model.
- the optimization process may use an optimization function to minimize the difference such as one of optimization functions in Eqn.1 and Eqn.2.
- the control logic calculates the distance function (squared difference) between the desired illuminance level(s) and the calculated illuminance levels at the grid points at the one or more spaces of the virtual building model. [0218] At operation 2044, the control logic determines if the optimization function is at a minimum. In one aspect, the control logic may determine the optimization function is at a minimum if the calculated distance function falls below some threshold. In addition or alternatively, the control logic may determine the optimization function is at a minimum if the gradient of the distance function (with respect to window transmissivity) falling below some threshold.
- control logic may iteratively adjust the transmissivity level(s) of one or more (virtual) tintable windows in the virtual building model until no further change to the transmissivity level(s) produces negative change in the distance function (closer to the desired minima) below a certain value (e.g., -.001).
- the control logic adjusts the current transmissivity level or levels of the one or more virtual tintable windows (operation 2046). In one case, if the difference is negative, the transmissivity is increased and if the difference is positive the transmissivity is decreased.
- the transmissivity level or levels may be adjusted by one of approximately 1%, approximately 2%, approximately 3%, approximately 4%, and approximately 5%.
- the control logic adjusts the current transmissivity level or levels of one or more zones of virtual tintable windows at operation 2046.
- the transmissivity of the one or more zones tintable windows associated with the one or more spaces may be adjusted.
- the transmissivity of the south-facing tintable windows and the east-facing tintable windows grouped together in the zone named “Open Office 1” in FIG.17 may be adjusted to meet a desired illuminance level in the Open Office 1 space.
- the control logic proceeds to operation 2050.
- the control logic determines a tint state for each tintable window of the one or more tintable windows that is associated with the transmissivity determined by the optimization process.
- a tintable window may be configured to tint to a plurality of tint states, each tint state associated with a level of transmissivity.
- the control logic may determine which of the plurality of tint states is associated with a transmissivity determined by the optimization process by rounding up (alternatively rounding down) the transmissivity determined by the optimization process to the closest level transmissivity corresponding to a tint state of the plurality of tint states.
- the one or more tintable windows may be configured to transition to 4 tint states (T1-T4) with tint 1 (T1) being a clear state and tint 4 (T4) being the darkest state.
- T1 corresponds to a transmissivity through a tintable window of about 50% (+/- 10%)
- T2 corresponds to a transmissivity through a tintable window in a range of about 25% to about 30% (+/- 10%)
- T3 corresponds to a transmissivity through a tintable window of about 7% (+/- 10%)
- T4 (darkest tint state) corresponds to a transmissivity through a tintable window of about 1% (+/- 10%).
- the control logic may round up (alternatively round down) the transmissivity determined by the optimization process to the next transmissivity level associated with one of the 4 tint states. For example, if the transmissivity for a first tintable window is determined to be 22% by the optimization process, the control logic may round up to 25% transmissivity, which is associated with tint state T2, and determine that the 22% transmissivity determined by the optimization process is associated with the tint state of T2. While some of the examples presented herein describe tintable windows as having four tint states, this disclosure is not limited to such windows. For example, the disclosed examples also apply to tintable windows having 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or even more tint levels.
- the one or more tintable windows may be configured to hold any transmissivity with a range of transmissivity levels and is considered to have an “infinite” number of tint states.
- the control logic does not perform operation 2050.
- the control logic may apply a voltage profile to hold each of the one or more tintable windows at the transmissivity level determined at operation 2040.
- the control logic includes operation 2060.
- the control logic applies one or more overrides if an override is in place. In some cases, the control logic may determine whether one or more overrides are in place.
- the control logic sets the final tint state to the override value at operation 2070. In implementations that do not include optional operation 2060, the control logic sets the final tint state to the tint level determined at operation 2050.
- the override(s) may be from one or more occupants. For example, the override may be input by a current occupant (e.g., a tenant) of the space that would like to override the control system and set the tint level. In other cases, the override(s) may be from a utility company, customer support personnel, building management personnel, etc.
- an override may be a high demand (or peak load) override, which is associated with a requirement of a utility that energy consumption in the building be reduced. For example, on particularly hot days in large metropolitan areas, it may be necessary to reduce energy consumption throughout the municipality in order to not overly tax the municipality’s energy generation and delivery systems. In such cases, the building management may override the tint level from the control logic to ensure that all tintable windows have a high tint level. In this example, this override may override a user’s manual override. There may be levels of priority in the override values.
- the override may be input from, e.g., a remote controller, a virtual reality controller, a cellular phone, an electronic notepad, a laptop computer, or and/or by a similar mobile device).
- the control logic may be configured to provide statistically- informed foreknowledge of site-specific override values based on past data (also referred to herein as “historical data”). For example, past override values used at a building may be utilized.
- the site specific values may be stored in memory as time series data. The ability to use past data obtained at a specific location for which a forecast is desired to be made enables the forecast to potentially be more accurate.
- determining a forecasted override involves a statistical assessment of the past data such as by taking a mean, an average, or a weighted average of one or more past override values.
- determining a forecasted override involves the use of machine learning classification algorithms suitable for clustering time series information into groups whose longitudinal sensor values exhibit similar shapes and patterns. According to the desired level of granularity (for a given hour of day, time of day, week, month, or season of the year), identified cluster centroids will show the trajectory of the mean values of all records in that time frame whose similarity amongst themselves can be quantitatively distinguished from other groups of similar records.
- the control logic transitions (or sends instructions to one or more controllers to transition) the one or more tintable windows to a final tint state if the tintable window(s) are currently at a different tint state. Alternatively, if the tintable windows are currently in the final tint state, the control logic holds (or sends instructions to one or more controllers to hold) the one or more tintable windows in the final tint state. [0227] In certain implementations, the control logic transitions, or holds, tintable windows based on the zoning of the tintable windows.
- a transmissivity and final tint state may be determined for a zone of tintable windows, and the control logic may transition or hold the zone of tintable windows according to that transmissivity determined for the zone.
- a customer spending time in a space of a building may desire real-time control of the level of natural light and/or level of artificial light in the space. This may be the case where a customer prefers sunlight over artificial lighting from, for example, incandescent, light-emitting diode (LED), or fluorescent lighting.
- certain tintable windows may impart too much of a blue color to the room in their darker tint states. This blue color is offset by allowing a portion of unfiltered daylight to enter the room.
- control logic may adjust one or more levels of artificial lighting as well as the transmissivities of one or more tintable windows in the virtual building model that cause a desired level of natural light and/or level of artificial light in the space.
- control logic may adjust one or more levels of artificial lighting as well as the transmissivities of one or more tintable windows in the virtual building model that cause a desired level of color and/or intensity of light in the space.
- a range between value 1 and value 2 is meant to be inclusive and include value 1 and value 2.
- the inclusive range will span any value from about value 1 to about value 2.
- the conjunction “and/or” in a phrase such as “including X, Y, and/or Z” refers to in inclusion of any combination or plurality of X, Y, and Z.
- such phrase is meant to include X.
- such phrase is meant to include Y.
- such phrase is meant to include Z.
- such phrase is meant to include X and Y.
- such phrase is meant to include X and Z.
- such phrase is meant to include Y and Z.
- such phrase is meant to include a plurality of Xs.
- such phrase is meant to include a plurality of Ys.
- such phrase is meant to include a plurality of Zs.
- such phrase is meant to include a plurality of Xs and a plurality of Ys.
- such phrase is meant to include a plurality of Xs and a plurality of Zs.
- such phrase is meant to include a plurality of Ys and a plurality of Zs.
- such phrase is meant to include a plurality of Xs and Y.
- such phrase is meant to include a plurality of Xs and Z.
- such phrase is meant to include a plurality of Ys and Z.
- such phrase is meant to include X and a plurality of Ys.
- such phrase is meant to include X and a plurality of Zs.
- such phrase is meant to include Y and a plurality of Zs.
- the conjunction “and/or” is meant to have the same effect as the phrase “X, Y, Z, or any combination or plurality thereof.”
- the conjunction “and/or” is meant to have the same effect as the phrase “one or more X, Y, Z, or any combination thereof.”
- the term “operatively coupled” or “operatively connected” refers to a first element (e.g., mechanism) that is coupled (e.g., connected) to a second element, to allow the intended operation of the second and/or first element.
- the coupling may comprise physical or non-physical coupling (e.g., communicative coupling).
- the non-physical coupling may comprise signal-induced coupling (e.g., wireless coupling).
- Coupled can include physical coupling (e.g., physically connected), or non-physical coupling (e.g., via wireless communication). Operatively coupled may comprise communicatively coupled.
- An element e.g., mechanism
- a structural feature includes an electrical feature, such as a circuitry or a circuit element.
- a structural feature may include an actuator.
- a structural feature may include a circuitry (e.g., comprising electrical or optical circuitry).
- Electrical circuitry may comprise one or more wires.
- the electrical circuitry may be configured to coupe to an electrical power source (e.g., to the electrical grid).
- the electrical circuitry may comprise a socket.
- Optical circuitry may comprise at least one optical element (e.g., beam splitter, mirror, lens and/or optical fiber).
- a structural feature may include a mechanical feature.
- a mechanical feature may comprise a latch, a spring, a closure, a hinge, a chassis, a support, a fastener, or a cantilever, and so forth.
- Performing the function may comprise utilizing a logical feature.
- a logical feature may include programming instructions. Programming instructions may be executable by at least one processor. Programming instructions may be stored or encoded on a medium accessible by one or more processors. Additionally, in the following description, the phrases “operable to,” “adapted to,” “configured to,” “designed to,” “programmed to,” or “capable of” may be used interchangeably where appropriate.
- Any of the software components or functions described in this application may be implemented as software code using any suitable computer language and/or computational software such as, for example, Java, C, C#, C++ or Python, LabVIEW, Mathematica, or other suitable language/computational software, including low level code, including code written for field programmable gate arrays, for example in VHDL.
- the code may include software libraries for functions like data acquisition and control, motion control, image acquisition and display, etc.
- Some or all of the code may also run on a personal computer, single board computer, embedded controller, microcontroller, digital signal processor, field programmable gate array and/or any combination thereof or any similar computation device and/or logic device(s).
- the software code may be stored as a series of instructions, or commands on a CRM such as a random access memory (RAM), a read only memory (ROM), a magnetic medium such as a hard-drive or a floppy disk, or an optical medium such as a CD-ROM, or solid stage storage such as a solid state hard drive or removable flash memory device or any suitable storage device.
- a CRM such as a random access memory (RAM), a read only memory (ROM), a magnetic medium such as a hard-drive or a floppy disk, or an optical medium such as a CD-ROM, or solid stage storage such as a solid state hard drive or removable flash memory device or any suitable storage device.
- RAM random access memory
- ROM read only memory
- magnetic medium such as a hard-drive or a f
- any composition or device that “comprises,” “has” or “includes” one or more features is not limited to possessing only those one or more features and can cover other unlisted features.
- All methods described herein can be performed in any suitable order unless otherwise indicated herein or otherwise clearly contradicted by context.
- the use of any and all examples, or exemplary language (e.g., “such as”) provided with respect to certain implementations herein is intended merely to better illuminate the present disclosure and does not pose a limitation on the scope of the present disclosure otherwise claimed. No language in the specification should be construed as indicating any non-claimed element essential to the practice of the present disclosure.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Structural Engineering (AREA)
- Architecture (AREA)
- Civil Engineering (AREA)
- Electrochromic Elements, Electrophoresis, Or Variable Reflection Or Absorption Elements (AREA)
- Image Analysis (AREA)
Abstract
Methods of controlling tintable window(s) comprising determining one or more transmissivities of the one or more tintable windows, wherein the one or more transmissivities are determined to generate a target illuminance level, or approximately the target illuminance level, at one or more grid points in an internal space of a virtual representation of the building, the one or more transmissivities determined based at least in part on attenuated clear sky data that is based at least in part on a predicted clear sky illuminance and readings from a plurality of sensors, and holding, or transitioning, the one or more tintable windows to an end tint state associated with the one or more determined transmissivities.
Description
INTELLIGENCE CROSS REFERENCES TO RELATED APPLICATIONS [0001] This application claims benefit of and priority to U.S. Provisional Application 63/364,698, titled “INTELLIGENCE,” and filed on May 13, 2022; this application is a continuation-in-part of U.S. Application 18/034,328, filed on April 27, 2023, titled “VIRTUALLY VIEWING DEVICES IN A FACILITY,” which is a national stage application under 35 U.S.C. §371 to International PCT Application PCT/US2021/057678, filed on November 2, 2021, and titled “VIRTUALLY VIEWING DEVICES IN A FACILITY;” PCT/US2021/057678 claims benefit of and priority to U.S. Provisional Application 63/109,306, filed November 3, 2020, titled “ACCOUNTING FOR DEVICES IN A FACILITY” and U.S. Provisional Application 63/214,741, filed June 24, 2021, titled “VIRTUALLY VIEWING DEVICES IN A FACILITY;” PCT/US2021/057678 is a continuation-in-part of International PCT Application PCT/US21/27418, filed April 15, 2021, titled “INTERACTION BETWEEN AN ENCLOSURE AND ONE OR MORE OCCUPANTS;” PCT/US2021/057678 is also a continuation-in-part of International PCT Application PCT/US21/33544, filed May 21, 2021, titled “ENVIRONMENTAL ADJUSTMENT USING ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE;” PCT/US2021/057678 is also a continuation-in-part of International PCT Application PCT/US2021/030798, filed May 5, 2021, titled “DEVICE ENSEMBLES AND COEXISTENCE MANAGEMENT OF DEVICES; PCT/US2021/057678 is also a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application Serial No.16/946,947, filed on July 13, 2020, titled “AUTOMATED COMMISSIONING OF CONTROLLERS IN A WINDOW NETWORK,” which is a national stage application under 35 U.S.C. §371 to International PCT Application PCT/US2017/062634 (designating the United States), filed November 20, 2017, titled “AUTOMATED COMMISSIONING OF CONTROLLERS IN A WINDOW NETWORK;” International PCT Application PCT/US2017/062634 claims benefit of and priority to U.S. Provisional application 62/426,126, filed on November 23, 2016 and to U.S. Provisional application 62/551,649, both titled “titled “AUTOMATED COMMISSIONING OF CONTROLLERS IN A WINDOW NETWORK;” PCT/US2021/057678 is also a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application Serial No.17/211,697, filed March 24, 2021, titled “COMMISSIONING WINDOW NETWORKS,” which is continuation of U.S. Patent Application Serial No.15/727,258, filed October 6, 2017, titled
“COMMISSIONING WINDOW NETWORKS;” PCT/US2021/057678 is also a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application Serial No.17/450,091 filed October 06, 2021, titled “MULTI-SENSOR HAVING A LIGHT DIFFUSING ELEMENT AROUND A PERIPHERY OF A RING OF PHOTOSENSORS,” which is a continuation of U.S. Patent Application Serial No.16/871,976 filed May 11, 2020, titled “ADJUSTING WINDOW TINT BASED AT LEAST IN PART ON SENSED SUN RADIATION,” which is a continuation of U.S. Patent Application Serial No.14/998,019 filed October 06, 2015 (now U.S. Patent 10,690,540 issued June 23, 2020) and titled “MULTI- SENSOR HAVING A LIGHT DIFFUSING ELEMENT AROUND A PERIPHERY OF A RING OF PHOTOSENSORS;” PCT/US2021/057678 is also a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application Serial No.16/696,887 filed November 26, 2019, titled “SENSING SUN RADIATION,” which is a continuation of U.S. Patent Application Serial No.15/287,646, filed October 6, 2016 (now U.S. Patent Serial No.10,533,892) and titled “MULTI-SENSOR,” which is a continuation-in part of U.S. Patent Application 14/998,019, filed October 06, 2015 (now U.S. Patent 10,690,540), titled “MULTI- SENSOR HAVING A LIGHT DIFFUSING ELEMENT AROUND A PERIPHERY OF A RING OF PHOTOSENSORS;” PCT/US2021/057678 is also a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application Serial No.17/380,785 filed July 20, 2021, titled “WINDOW ANTENNAS,” which claims priority to U.S. Patent Application Serial No.16/099,424, filed November 6, 2018, titled “WINDOW ANTENNAS,” which is a national stage application under 35 U.S.C. §371 to International PCT Application PCT/US17/31106, filed May 4, 2017, titled, “WINDOW ANTENNAS;” PCT/US2021/057678 is also a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application Serial No.17/385,810, filed July 26, 2021, titled “WINDOW ANTENNAS,” which claims priority to U.S. Patent Application Serial No.16/099,424; PCT/US2021/057678 is also a continuation-in-part U.S. Patent Application Serial No.16/980,305, filed September 11, 2020, titled “WIRELESSLY POWERED AND POWERING ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS,” which is a national stage application under 35 U.S.C. §371 to International PCT Application PCT/US19/22129, filed March 13, 2019, titled “WIRELESSLY POWERED AND POWERING ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS;” this application is related to U.S. Patent application 17/250,586, titled “CONTROL METHODS AND SYSTEMS USING EXTERNAL 3D MODELING AND NEURAL NETWORKS,” and filed on February 5, 2021, which is a national stage application under 35 U.S.C. §371 to International PCT Application PCT/US2019/046524, titled “CONTROL METHODS AND SYSTEMS
USING EXTERNAL 3D MODELING AND NEURAL NETWORKS,” and filed on August 14, 2019; PCT/US2019/046524 claims benefit of and priority to U.S. Provisional Patent Application No.62/764,821, filed on August 15, 2018 and titled “CONTROL METHODS AND SYSTEMS USING EXTERNAL 3D MODELING AND NEURAL NETWORKS,” to U.S. Provisional Patent Application No.62/745,920, filed on October 15, 2018 and titled “CONTROL METHODS AND SYSTEMS USING EXTERNAL 3D MODELING AND NEURAL NETWORKS,” and to U.S. Provisional Patent Application No.62/805,841 filed on February 14,2019 and titled “CONTROL METHODS AND SYSTEMS USING EXTERNAL 3D MODELING AND NEURAL NETWORKS;” International PCT application PCT/US2019/046524 is also a continuation-in-part of International PCT application PCT/US2019/023268, filed on March 20, 2019 and titled “CONTROL METHODS AND SYSTEMS USING EXTERNAL 3D MODELING AND SCHEDULE-BASED,” which claims benefit of and priority to U.S. Provisional Patent Application No.62/646,260 filed on March 21, 2018 and titled “METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR CONTROLLING TINTABLE WINDOWS WITH CLOUD DETECTION” and U.S. Provisional Patent Application No.62/666,572 filed on May 3, 2018 and titled “CONTROL METHODS AND SYSTEMS USING EXTERNAL 3D MODELING AND SCHEDULE-BASED COMPUTING;” International PCT application PCT/US2019/023268 is a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application No.16/013,770, filed on June 20, 2018 and titled “CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS,” which is a continuation of U.S. Patent Application 15/347,677, titled “CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS” and filed on November 9, 2016; U.S. Patent Application 15/347,677 is a continuation-in-part of International PCT application PCT/US15/29675 filed on May 7, 2015 and titled “CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS,” which claims benefit and priority to 61/991,375 filed on May 9, 2014 and titled “CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS;” U.S. Patent Application 15/347,677 is also a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application 13/772,969, filed on February 21, 2013 and titled “CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS;” International PCT application PCT/US2019/046524 is also a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application No.16/438,177, titled “APPLICATIONS FOR CONTROLLING OPTICALLY SWITCHABLE DEVICES” and filed on June 11, 2019, which is a continuation of U.S. Patent Application No.14/391,122, filed on October 7, 2014 and titled “APPLICATIONS FOR CONTROLLING OPTICALLY SWITCHABLE DEVICES;” U.S. Patent Application No.14/391,122 is a national stage
application under 35 U.S.C. §371 of International PCT Application PCT/US2013/036456, titled “APPLICATIONS FOR CONTROLLING OPTICALLY SWITCHABLE DEVICES” and filed on April 12, 2013, which claims priority to and benefit of U.S. Provisional 61/624,175, titled “APPLICATIONS FOR CONTROLLING OPTICALLY SWITCHABLE DEVICES” and filed on April 13, 2012; this application is related to U.S. Patent Application 16/982,535, titled “CONTROL METHODS AN SYSTEMS USING EXTERNAL 3D MODELING AND SCHEDULE-BASED COMPUTING,” filed on September 18, 2020, which is a national stage application under 35 U.S.C. §371 of International PCT Application PCT/US2019/023268, titled “CONTROL METHODS AN SYSTEMS USING EXTERNAL 3D MODELING AND SCHEDULE-BASED COMPUTING,” and filed on March 20, 2019; PCT/US2019/023268 claims benefit of and priority to U.S. Provisional Patent Application No.62/646,260, filed on March 21, 2018, and titled “METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR CONTROLLING TINTABLE WINDOWS WITH CLOUD DETECTION,” and to U.S. Provisional Patent Application No.62/666,572, filed on May 3, 2018 and titled “CONTROL METHODS AND SYSTEMS USING EXTERNAL 3D MODELING AND SCHEDULE-BASED COMPUTING;” PCT/US2019/023268 is also a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application 16/013,770, titled “CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS,” and filed on June 20, 2018, which is a continuation of U.S. Patent Application 15/347,677, titled “CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS,” and filed on November 9, 2016, which is a continuation-in-part of International Patent Application PCT/US15/29675, titled, “CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS,” filed on May 7, 2015, which claims priority to and benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No.61/991,375, titled “CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS” and filed on May 9, 2014; U.S. Patent Application 15/347,677 is also a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application No.13/772,969, titled “CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS” and filed on February 21, 2013; this application is related to U.S. Patent Application Serial No.17/400,596, titled “AUTOMATED COMMISSIONING OF CONTROLLERS IN A WINDOW NETWORK,” filed on August 12, 2021, which is a continuation of U.S. Patent Application 16/462,916, titled “AUTOMATED COMMISSIONING OF CONTROLLERS IN A WINDOW NETWORK,” and filed on May 21, 2019; U.S. Patent Application 16/462,916 is a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent application 16/082,793, filed September 6, 2018, titled “METHOD OF COMMISSIONING
ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS,” which is a national stage application under 35 U.S.C. §371 to International PCT Application PCT/US2017/020805 filed on March 3, 2017, titled METHOD OF COMMISSIONING ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS,” which claims benefit of and priority to U.S. Provisional Applications 62,370,174, filed on August 2, 2016 and 62/305,892 filed on March 9, 2016, both titled “METHOD OF COMMISSIONING ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS; U.S. Patent Application 16/462,916 is a national stage application under 35 U.S.C. §371 to International PCT Application PCT/US2017/062634, which claims benefit and priority to U.S. Provisional Applications 62/551,649, filed on August 29, 2017 and 62/426,126, filed on November 23, 2016; U.S. Patent Application 16/462,916 is a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application 14/951,410, filed on November 24, 2015; U.S. Patent Application 14/951,410 claims benefit of and priority to U.S. Provisional Applications 62/348,181, filed on October 29, 2015 and 62/085,179, filed on November 26, 2014; U.S. Patent Application 14/951,410 is a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent 14/401,081, filed on November 13, 2014, which is a national stage application under 35 U.S.C. §371 to International PCT Application PCT/US2013/042765, filed on May 24, 2013; PCT/US2013/042765 claims benefit of and priority to U.S. Provisional Application 61/652,021, filed on May 25, 2012; U.S. Patent Application 14/951,410 is also a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application 14/468,778, filed on August 26, 2014, which is a continuation of U.S. Patent Application 13/479,137, filed on May 23, 2012, which is a continuation of U.S. Patent Application 13/049750, filed on March 16, 2011, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application 12/971,576, filed on December 17, 2010, which claims benefit of and priority to U.S. Provisional Application 61/289,319, filed on December 22, 2009; U.S. Patent Application 14/951,410 is also a continuation-in-part of 13/449,248, filed on April 17, 2012; this application is related to U.S. Patent Application 18/100,773, titled “AUTOMATED COMMISSIONING OF CONTROLLERS IN A WINDOW NETWORK,” and filed on January 24, 2023, which is a continuation of U.S. Patent Application Serial No.16/946,947, filed on July 13, 2020, titled “AUTOMATED COMMISSIONING OF CONTROLLERS IN A WINDOW NETWORK,” which is a national stage application under 35 U.S.C. §371 to International PCT Application PCT/US2017/062634 (designating the United States), filed November 20, 2017, titled “AUTOMATED COMMISSIONING OF CONTROLLERS IN A WINDOW NETWORK;” International PCT Application PCT/US2017/062634 claims benefit of and priority to U.S. Provisional application 62/426,126, filed on November 23,
2016 and to U.S. Provisional application 62/551,649, both titled “AUTOMATED COMMISSIONING OF CONTROLLERS IN A WINDOW NETWORK;” this application is related to U.S. Patent Application 17/931,014, filed on September 9, 2022, titled “METHODS OF CONTROLLING MULTI-ZONE TINTABLE WINDOWS,” which is a continuation of U.S. Patent Application Serial No.15/762,077, titled “METHODS OF CONTROLLING MULTI-ZONE TINTABLE WINDOWS,” filed on March 21, 2018; U.S. Patent Application Serial No.15/762,077 is a continuation of U.S. Patent Application 15/762,077, titled “METHODS OF CONTROLLING MULTI-ZONE TINTABLE WINDOWS” and filed on March 21, 2018, which is a national stage application under 35 U.S.C. §371 to International PCT Application PCT/US2016/055005, filed on September 30, 2016, titled “METHODS OF CONTROLLING MULTI-ZONE TINTABLE WINDOWS;” International PCT Application PCT/US2016/055005 is a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application 15/094897, filed on April 18, 2016; International PCT Application PCT/US2016/055005 claims benefit of and priority to U.S. Provisional 62/236,032, filed on October 1, 2015; U.S. Patent Application 14/137,644 is a continuation-in-part of International PCT Application PCT/US2013/069913, filed on November 13, 2013; International PCT Application PCT/US2013/069913 claims benefit of and priority to U.S. Provisional Applications 61/740,651, filed on December 21, 2012 and 61/725,980, filed on November 13, 2012; 14/137,644 is a continuation-in-part of International PCT Application PCT/US2013/031098, filed on March 13, 2013; International PCT Application PCT/US2013/031098 claims benefit of and priority to U.S. Provisional Patent Application 61/610,241, filed on March 13, 2012; each of these applications is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety and for all purposes. BACKGROUND [0002] Electrochromism is a phenomenon in which a material exhibits a reversible electrochemically-mediated change in an optical property when placed in a different electronic state, typically by being subjected to a voltage change. The optical property is typically one or more of color, transmittance, absorbance, and reflectance. One well known electrochromic material is tungsten oxide (WO3). Tungsten oxide is a cathodic electrochromic material in which a coloration transition, transparent to blue, occurs by electrochemical reduction. [0003] Electrochromic materials may be incorporated into, for example, windows for residential, commercial, and other uses. The color, transmittance, absorbance, and/or
reflectance of such windows may be changed by changing a feature of the electrochromic material, that is, electrochromic windows are windows that can be darkened or lightened electronically. A small voltage applied to an electrochromic device of the window will cause them to darken; reversing the voltage causes them to lighten. This capability allows control of the amount of light that passes through the windows, and presents an opportunity for electrochromic windows to be used as energy-saving devices. [0004] While electrochromism was discovered in the 1960s, electrochromic devices, and particularly electrochromic windows, still suffer various problems and have not begun to realize their full commercial potential despite many recent advancements in electrochromic technology, apparatus, software, and related methods of making and/or using electrochromic devices. SUMMARY [0005] Embodiments pertain to a method controlling one or more tintable windows in a building. The method comprises determining one or more transmissivities of the one or more tintable windows. The one or more transmissivities determined to generate a target illuminance level, or approximately the target illuminance level, at one or more grid points in an internal space of a virtual representation of the building, The one or more transmissivities determined based at least in part on attenuated clear sky data that is based at least in part on a predicted clear sky illuminance and readings from a plurality of sensors. The method further comprising holding, or transitioning, the one or more tintable windows to an end tint state associated with the one or more determined transmissivities. [0006] Embodiments pertain to a method controlling one or more tintable windows in a building. The method comprises determining one or more transmissivities of one or more tintable windows in the building. The one or more transmissivities are determined based on attenuated clear sky data to generate a target illuminance level, or approximately the target illuminance level, in an internal space of a virtual representation of the building. The method further comprising forecasting an override tint value based on a statistical assessment of past override values. In addition, the method comprise holding, or transitioning, the one or more tintable windows to one or more end tint states associated with the one or more transmissivities determined or to the override tint value if an override is in place. [0007] Embodiments pertain to a method controlling one or more tintable windows in a building. The method comprises receiving a target level for an internal condition of the building using a virtual representation of the building. The target level comprises one or
more of an illuminance level in an internal space of the building, a heat gain into the internal space of the building, or a color of light in the internal space of the building. The method further comprises determining one or more transmissivities of one or more tintable windows in the building, wherein the one or more transmissivities are determined to generate the target level, or approximately the target level in the building. In addition, the method comprises holding, or transitioning, the one or more tintable windows to an end tint state associated with the one or more transmissivities determined. [0008] Embodiments pertain to an apparatus for controlling tint of one or more tintable windows in a building, the apparatus comprising at least one controller configured to operatively couple to the one or more tintable windows, the at least one controller further configured to perform, or direct performance of, any one of the methods of controlling one or more tintable windows in a building. [0009] Embodiments pertain to a non-transitory computer readable medium storing computer executable instructions for controlling tint of one or more zones of tintable windows in a building, when read by one or more processors, cause the one or more processors to execute operations of any one of the methods of controlling one or more tintable windows in a building. [0010] Embodiments pertain to a system for controlling tint of one or more zones of tintable windows in a building, the system comprises a network configured to operatively couple to the one or more tintable windows and configured to perform any one of the methods of controlling one or more tintable windows in a building. [0011] These and other features and embodiments will be described in more detail with reference to the drawings. [0012] Additional aspects and advantages of the present disclosure will become readily apparent to those skilled in this art from the following detailed description, wherein only illustrative embodiments of the present disclosure are shown and described. As will be realized, the present disclosure is capable of other and different embodiments, and its several details are capable of modifications in various obvious respects, all without departing from the disclosure. Accordingly, the drawings and description are to be regarded as illustrative in nature, and not as restrictive. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS [0013] The figures and components therein may not be drawn to scale. [0014] FIG.1A is a schematic drawing of a cross-section of an electrochromic lite, according to implementations.
[0015] FIG.1B is a schematic drawing of a cross-section of the electrochromic lite in FIG.1A. [0016] FIG.1C is a schematic drawing of a top down view of the electrochromic lite in FIG.1A. [0017] FIG.2A is a schematic drawing of a cross-section of an IGU with the electrochromic lite described in relation to FIGS.1A-1C, according to implementations. [0018] FIG.2B is a schematic drawing of a cross-section of an electrochromic device, described in relation to FIGS.1A-1C and a reinforcing pane laminated thereon, according to implementations. [0019] FIG.3A is a schematic drawing of a cross-section of an electrochromic device, according to implementations. [0020] FIG.3B is a schematic drawing of a cross-section of an electrochromic device in a bleached state, according to implementations. [0021] FIG.3C is a schematic drawing of a cross-section of an electrochromic device in a colored state, according to implementations. [0022] FIG.4 is a simplified block diagram of components of a window controller and components of a window controller system, according to implementations. [0023] FIG.5 is a schematic diagram of a control system for controlling tint of a plurality of tintable windows in a building, according to implementations. [0024] FIG.6 is a schematic diagram of a network system with a building management system (BMS), a plurality of distributed local window controllers (WCs), a plurality of network controllers (NCs), and a master controller (MC), according to implementations. [0025] FIG.7 is a schematic diagram of a plurality of tintable windows grouped into zones, according to implementations. [0026] FIG.8 is a schematic diagram depicting a virtual building model and associated BIM file(s), according to implementations. [0027] FIG.9 shows an example embodiment of a control system in which a real, physical building includes a controller network for managing and controlling interactive network devices such as one or more tintable windows, according to implementations. [0028] FIG.10 is a schematic illustration of a flux-transfer path from the sky to a grid point in an interior space such as a room of a building simulated by a three-phase simulation model, according to an implementation.
[0029] FIG.11 is a schematic illustration of a sky segment/patch (Sα) providing an illuminance (Lα) through an aperture of a tintable window in a room of a building to provide an illuminance level at a grid point (x) inside the room, according to an aspect. [0030] FIG.12A is a three dimensional illustration of a sky dome having a plurality of 145 light patches, according to implementations. [0031] FIG.12B is a 2D projection of the sky dome shown in FIG.12A. [0032] FIG.13A is an illustration of a 2D projection of the sky dome shown in FIG. 12A depicting illuminance values for light patches based on attenuated clear sky data, in an implementation. [0033] FIG.13B is an illustration of a 2D top view of a virtual building model used in conjunction with the sky dome to illustrate illuminance levels within the interior of the building, in an implementation. [0034] FIG.13C is a bar chart of illuminance levels in various spaces of the virtual building model, in an implementation. [0035] FIG.14A is a drawing of an isometric view of a portion of a multi-sensor device having a plurality of photosensors equally distributed along the circumference, a photosensor pointed upward vertically, and two infrared sensors pointed upward vertically, according to an implementation. [0036] FIG.14B is a schematic drawing of a cross sectional view of a portion of a multi-sensor device having two rings of photosensors and a photosensor pointed upward vertically, according to an implementation. [0037] FIG.15 is an isometric view of an example of a multi-sensor device with photosensors directed at various azimuthal and altitudinal angles of the sky, according to an implementation. [0038] FIG.16A is plot of photosensor readings from thirteen (13) photosensors of multi-sensor device shown in FIG.14A on a clear sky day on February 16, 2022 in Milpitas California. [0039] FIG.16B is plot of photosensor readings from thirteen (13) photosensors of multi-sensor device shown in FIG.14A on an overcast morning and clear afternoon on April 11, 2022 in Milpitas California. [0040] FIG.17 is a diagram depicting operations of a method of generating one or more zones of tintable windows and associated orientations of the tintable windows, according to an implementation.
[0041] FIG.18 is an illustration of an example of a system in which a virtual building model is used to present a 2D or a 3D model of virtual spaces in a building to a customer based on building information in files (e.g., BIM files) of the virtual building model, according to an implementation. [0042] FIG.19 is schematic diagram of a system for controlling tint of one or more tintable windows, according to an implementation. [0043] FIG.20 is a flowchart depicting operations of a method of controlling one or more tintable windows in a facility such as a building, according to various aspects. [0044] FIG.21 is a flowchart depicting operations of an optimization process, according to various aspects.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION [0045] Different aspects are described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. The features illustrated in the drawings may not be to scale. In the following description, numerous specific details are set forth in order to provide a thorough understanding of the presented implementations. The disclosed implementations may be practiced without one or more of these specific details. In other instances, well-known operations have not been described in detail to avoid unnecessarily obscuring the disclosed implementations. While the disclosed implementations will be described in conjunction with specific examples, it will be understood that it is not intended to limit the disclosed implementations. [0046] Numeric ranges are inclusive of the numbers defining the range. It is intended that every maximum numerical limitation given throughout this specification includes every lower numerical limitation, as if such lower numerical limitations were expressly written herein. Every minimum numerical limitation given throughout this specification will include every higher numerical limitation, as if such higher numerical limitations were expressly written herein. Every numerical range given throughout this specification will include every narrower numerical range that falls within such broader numerical range, as if such narrower numerical ranges were all expressly written herein. [0047] The term “tintable window” refers to a window (e.g., an architectural window) comprising one or more optically switchable devices (e.g., electrochromic devices). An example of a tintable window is an electrochromic window having one or more tintable devices. In examples involving commissioning of tintable windows, a tintable window is sometimes referred to as an “insulated glass unit” or “IGU.” [0048] The headings provided herein are not intended to limit the disclosure. [0049] Unless defined otherwise herein, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art. Various scientific dictionaries that include the terms included herein are well known and available to those in the art. Although any methods and materials similar or equivalent to those described herein find use in the practice or testing of the embodiments disclosed herein, some methods and materials are described. [0050] The terms defined immediately below are more fully described by reference to the Specification as a whole. It is to be understood that this disclosure is not limited to the
particular methodology, protocols, and reagents described, as these may vary, depending upon the context they are used by those of skill in the art. [0051] As used herein, the singular terms “a,” “an,” and “the” include the plural reference unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. I. Introduction and Context of Tintable Windows and Window Controllers [0052] In order to orient the reader to the embodiments of systems, apparatus, and methods disclosed herein, a brief discussion of electrochromic devices, tintable windows, and window controllers is provided. This initial discussion is provided for context only, and the subsequently described embodiments are not limited to the specific features and fabrication processes of this initial discussion. Moreover, it would be understood that a tintable window may include one or more electrochromic devices in some aspects, and in addition or alternatively, include one or more other optically switchable devices in other aspects. A. Electrochromic devices [0053] A particular example of an electrochromic lite is described with reference to FIGS.1A-1C, in order to illustrate embodiments described herein. FIG.1A is a cross- sectional representation (see section cut X’-X’ of FIG.1C) of an electrochromic lite 100, which is fabricated starting with a glass sheet 105. FIG.1B shows an end view (see viewing perspective Y-Y’ of FIG.1C) of electrochromic lite 100, and FIG.1C shows a top-down view of electrochromic lite 100. FIG.1A shows the electrochromic lite after fabrication on glass sheet 105, edge deleted to produce area 140, around the perimeter of the lite. The electrochromic lite has also been laser scribed and bus bars have been attached. A bus bar (also busbar) is a metallic strip or bar for distributing current. The glass lite 105 has a diffusion barrier 110, and a first transparent conducting oxide layer (TCO) 115, on the diffusion barrier. In this example, the edge deletion process removes both TCO 115 and diffusion barrier 110, but in other embodiments only the TCO is removed, leaving the diffusion barrier intact. The TCO 115 is the first of two conductive layers used to form the electrodes of the electrochromic device fabricated on the glass sheet. In this example, the glass sheet includes underlying glass and the diffusion barrier layer. Thus, in this example, the diffusion barrier is formed, and then the first TCO, an electrochromic stack 125, (e.g., having electrochromic, ion conductor, and counter electrode layers), and a second TCO 130, are formed. In one embodiment, the electrochromic device (electrochromic stack and second TCO) is fabricated in an
integrated deposition system where the glass sheet does not leave the integrated deposition system at any time during fabrication of the stack. In one embodiment, the first TCO layer is also formed using the integrated deposition system where the glass sheet does not leave the integrated deposition system during deposition of the electrochromic stack and the (second) TCO layer. In one embodiment, all the layers (diffusion barrier, first TCO, electrochromic stack, and second TCO) are deposited in the integrated deposition system where the glass sheet does not leave the integrated deposition system during deposition. In this example, prior to deposition of electrochromic stack 125, an isolation trench 120, is cut through TCO 115 and diffusion barrier 110. Trench 120 is made in contemplation of electrically isolating an area of TCO 115 that will reside under bus bar 1 after fabrication is complete (see FIG.1A). This is done to avoid charge buildup and coloration of the electrochromic device under the bus bar, which can be undesirable. [0054] After formation of the electrochromic device, edge deletion processes and additional laser scribing are performed. FIG.1A depicts areas 140 where the device has been removed, in this example, from a perimeter region surrounding laser scribe trenches 150, 155, 160, and 165. Trenches 150, 160 and 165 pass through the electrochromic stack and also through the first TCO and diffusion barrier. Trench 155 passes through second TCO 130 and the electrochromic stack, but not the first TCO 115. Laser scribe trenches 150, 155, 160, and 165 are made to isolate portions of the electrochromic device, 135, 145, 170, and 175, which were potentially damaged during edge deletion processes from the operable electrochromic device. In this example, laser scribe trenches 150, 160, and 165 pass through the first TCO to aid in isolation of the device (laser scribe trench 155 does not pass through the first TCO, otherwise it would cut off bus bar 2’s electrical communication with the first TCO and thus the electrochromic stack). The laser or lasers used for the laser scribe processes are typically, but not necessarily, pulse-type lasers, for example, diode-pumped solid-state lasers. For example, the laser scribe processes can be performed using a suitable laser from IPG Photonics (of Oxford, Massachusetts), or from Ekspla (of Vilnius, Lithuania). Scribing can also be performed mechanically, for example, by a diamond tipped scribe. One of ordinary skill in the art would appreciate that the laser scribing processes can be performed at different depths and/or performed in a single process whereby the laser cutting depth is varied, or not, during a continuous path around the perimeter of the electrochromic device. In one embodiment, the edge deletion is performed to the depth of the first TCO.
[0055] After laser scribing is complete, bus bars are attached. Non-penetrating bus bar 1 is applied to the second TCO. Non-penetrating bus bar 2 is applied to an area where the device was not deposited (e.g., from a mask protecting the first TCO from device deposition), in contact with the first TCO or, in this example, where an edge deletion process (e.g., laser ablation using an apparatus having an XY or XYZ galvanometer) was used to remove material down to the first TCO. In this example, both bus bar 1 and bus bar 2 are non-penetrating bus bars. A penetrating bus bar is one that is typically pressed into and through the electrochromic stack to make contact with the TCO at the bottom of the stack. A non-penetrating bus bar is one that does not penetrate into the electrochromic stack layers, but rather makes electrical and physical contact on the surface of a conductive layer, for example, a TCO. [0056] The TCO layers can be electrically connected using a non-traditional bus bar, for example, a bus bar fabricated with screen and lithography patterning methods. In one embodiment, electrical communication is established with the device’s transparent conducting layers via silk screening (or using another patterning method) a conductive ink followed by heat curing or sintering the ink. Advantages to using the above described device configuration include simpler manufacturing, for example, and less laser scribing than conventional techniques which use penetrating bus bars. [0057] After the bus bars are connected, the device is integrated into an insulated glass unit (IGU), which includes, for example, wiring for the bus bars and the like. In some embodiments, one or both of the bus bars are inside the finished IGU, however in one embodiment one bus bar is outside the seal of the IGU and one bus bar is inside the IGU. In the former embodiment, area 140 is used to make the seal with one face of the spacer used to form the IGU. Thus, the wires or other connection to the bus bars runs between the spacer and the glass. As many spacers are made of metal, e.g., stainless steel, which is conductive, it is desirable to take steps to avoid short circuiting due to electrical communication between the bus bar and connector thereto and the metal spacer. In the embodiments described herein, both of the bus bars are inside the primary seal of the finished IGU. [0058] FIG.2A shows a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the electrochromic lite described in relation to FIGS.1A-1C integrated into an IGU 200. A spacer 205 is used to separate the electrochromic lite from a second lite 210. Second lite 210 in IGU 200 is a non-electrochromic lite, however, the embodiments disclosed herein are not so limited. For example, lite 210 can have an electrochromic device thereon and/or one or more
coatings such as low-E coatings and the like. Lite 201 can be laminated glass, such as depicted in FIG.2B (lite 201 is laminated to reinforcing pane 230, via resin 235). Between spacer 205 and the glass 201 of the electrochromic lite is a primary seal material 215. This primary seal material is also between spacer 205 and second glass lite 210. Around the perimeter of spacer 205 is a secondary seal 220. Bus bar wiring/leads traverse the seals for connection to a controller. Secondary seal 220 may be much thicker that depicted. These seals aid in keeping moisture out of an interior volume 225, of the IGU. They also serve to prevent argon or other gas in the interior of the IGU from escaping. [0059] FIG.3A schematically depicts an electrochromic device 300, in cross-section. Electrochromic device 300 includes a substrate 302, a first conductive layer (CL) 304, an electrochromic layer (EC) 306, an ion conducting layer (IC) 308, a counter electrode layer (CE) 310, and a second conductive layer (CL) 314. Layers 304, 306, 308, 310, and 314 are collectively referred to as an electrochromic stack 320. A voltage source 316 operable to apply an electric potential across electrochromic stack 320 effects the transition of the electrochromic device from, for example, a bleached state to a colored state (depicted). The order of layers can be reversed with respect to the substrate. [0060] Electrochromic devices having distinct layers as described can be fabricated as all solid-state devices and/or all inorganic devices. Such devices and methods of fabricating them are described in more detail in U.S. Patent Application Serial Number 12/645,111, entitled “Fabrication of Low-Defectivity Electrochromic Devices,” filed on December 22, 2009, and naming Mark Kozlowski et al. as inventors, and in U.S. Patent Application Serial Number 12/645,159, entitled, “Electrochromic Devices,” filed on December 22, 2009 and naming Zhongchun Wang et al. as inventors, both of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties. It should be understood, however, that any one or more of the layers in the stack may contain some amount of organic material. The same can be said for liquids that may be present in one or more layers in small amounts. It should also be understood that solid state material may be deposited or otherwise formed by processes employing liquid components such as certain processes employing sol-gels or chemical vapor deposition. [0061] Additionally, it should be understood that the reference to a transition between a bleached state and colored state is non-limiting and suggests only one example, among many, of an electrochromic transition that may be implemented. Unless otherwise specified herein (including the foregoing discussion), whenever reference is made to a bleached-colored transition (or equivalently a clear-tinted transition), the corresponding
device or process encompasses other optical state transitions such as non-reflective- reflective, transparent-opaque, etc. Further, the term “bleached” or “clear” refers to an optically neutral state, for example, uncolored, transparent, or translucent. Still further, unless specified otherwise herein, the “color” or “tint” of an electrochromic transition is not limited to any particular wavelength or range of wavelengths. As understood by those of skill in the art, the choice of appropriate electrochromic and counter electrode materials governs the relevant optical transition. [0062] In embodiments described herein, the electrochromic device reversibly cycles between a bleached/clear state and a colored/tinted state. In some cases, when the device is in a bleached state, a potential is applied to the electrochromic stack 320 such that available ions in the stack reside primarily in the counter electrode 310. When the potential on the electrochromic stack is reversed, the ions are transported across the ion conducting layer 308 to the electrochromic material 306 and cause the material to transition to the colored state. In a similar way, the electrochromic device of embodiments described herein can be reversibly cycled between different tint levels (e.g., bleached state, darkest colored state, and intermediate levels between the bleached state and the darkest colored state). [0063] Referring again to FIG.3A, voltage source 316 may be configured to operate in conjunction with radiant and other environmental sensors. As described herein, voltage source 316 interfaces with a device controller (not shown in this figure). Additionally, voltage source 316 may interface with an energy management system that controls the electrochromic device according to various criteria such as the time of year, time of day, and measured environmental conditions. Such an energy management system, in conjunction with large area electrochromic devices (e.g., an electrochromic window), can dramatically lower the energy consumption of a building. [0064] Any material having suitable optical, electrical, thermal, and mechanical properties may be used as substrate 302. Such substrates include, for example, glass, plastic, and mirror materials. Suitable glasses include either clear or tinted soda lime glass, including soda lime float glass. The glass may be tempered or untempered. [0065] In many cases, the substrate is a glass pane sized for residential window applications. The size of such glass pane can vary widely depending on the specific needs of the residence. In other cases, the substrate is architectural glass. Architectural glass is typically used in commercial buildings, but may also be used in residential buildings, and typically, though not necessarily, separates an indoor environment from an outdoor
environment. In certain embodiments, architectural glass is at least 20 inches by 20 inches, and can be much larger, for example, as large as about 80 inches by 120 inches. Architectural glass is typically at least about 2 mm thick, typically between about 3 mm and about 6 mm thick. Of course, electrochromic devices are scalable to substrates smaller or larger than architectural glass. Further, the electrochromic device may be provided on a mirror of any size and shape. [0066] On top of substrate 302 is conductive layer 304. In certain embodiments, one or both of the conductive layers 304 and 314 is inorganic and/or solid. Conductive layers 304 and 314 may be made from a number of different materials, including conductive oxides, thin metallic coatings, conductive metal nitrides, and composite conductors. Typically, conductive layers 304 and 314 are transparent at least in the range of wavelengths where electrochromism is exhibited by the electrochromic layer. Transparent conductive oxides include metal oxides and metal oxides doped with one or more metals. Examples of such metal oxides and doped metal oxides include indium oxide, indium tin oxide, doped indium oxide, tin oxide, doped tin oxide, zinc oxide, aluminum zinc oxide, doped zinc oxide, ruthenium oxide, doped ruthenium oxide and the like. Since oxides are often used for these layers, they are sometimes referred to as “transparent conductive oxide” (TCO) layers. Thin metallic coatings that are substantially transparent may also be used, as well as combinations of TCO’s and metallic coatings. [0067] In some embodiments, commercially available substrates such as glass substrates contain a transparent conductive layer coating. Such products may be used for both substrate and conductive layer. Examples of such glasses include conductive layer coated glasses sold under the trademark TEC Glass™ by Pilkington, of Toledo, Ohio and SUNGATE™ 300 and SUNGATE™ 500 by PPG Industries of Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania. TEC Glass™ is a glass coated with a fluorinated tin oxide conductive layer. [0068] In some embodiments of the invention, the same conductive layer is used for both conductive layers (i.e., conductive layers). In some embodiments, different conductive materials are used for each conductive layer. For example, in some embodiments, TEC Glass™ is used for substrate (float glass) and conductive layer (fluorinated tin oxide) and indium tin oxide (ITO) is used for conductive layer. In some embodiments employing TEC Glass™ there is a sodium diffusion barrier between the glass substrate and TEC conductive layer. The function of the conductive layers is to spread an electric potential provided by voltage source 316 over surfaces of the electrochromic stack 320 to interior regions of the stack, with relatively little ohmic
potential drop. The electric potential is transferred to the conductive layers though electrical connections to the conductive layers. In some embodiments, bus bars, one in contact with conductive layer 304 and one in contact with conductive layer 314, provide the electric connection between the voltage source 316 and the conductive layers 304 and 314. The conductive layers 304 and 314 may also be connected to the voltage source 316 with other conventional means. [0069] Overlaying conductive layer 304 is electrochromic layer 306. In some embodiments, electrochromic layer 306 is inorganic and/or solid. The electrochromic layer may contain any one or more of a number of different electrochromic materials, including metal oxides. Such metal oxides include tungsten oxide (WO3), molybdenum oxide (MoO3), niobium oxide (Nb2O5), titanium oxide (TiO2), copper oxide (CuO), iridium oxide (Ir2O3), chromium oxide (Cr2O3), manganese oxide (Mn2O3), vanadium oxide (V2O5), nickel oxide (Ni2O3), cobalt oxide (Co2O3) and the like. During operation, electrochromic layer 306 transfers ions to and receives ions from counter electrode layer 310 to cause optical transitions. [0070] Generally, the colorization (or change in any optical property – e.g., absorbance, reflectance, and transmittance) of the electrochromic material is caused by reversible ion insertion into the material (e.g., intercalation) and a corresponding injection of a charge balancing electron. Typically some fraction of the ions responsible for the optical transition is irreversibly bound up in the electrochromic material. Some or all of the irreversibly bound ions are used to compensate “blind charge” in the material. In most electrochromic materials, suitable ions include lithium ions (Li+) and hydrogen ions (H+) (that is, protons). In some cases, however, other ions will be suitable. In various embodiments, lithium ions are used to produce the electrochromic phenomena. Intercalation of lithium ions into tungsten oxide (WO3-y (0 < y ≤ ~0.3)) causes the tungsten oxide to change from transparent (bleached state) to blue (colored state). [0071] Referring again to FIG.3A, in electrochromic stack 320, ion conducting layer 308 is sandwiched between electrochromic layer 306 and counter electrode layer 310. In some embodiments, counter electrode layer 310 is inorganic and/or solid. The counter electrode layer may include one or more of a number of different materials that serve as a reservoir of ions when the electrochromic device is in the bleached state. During an electrochromic transition initiated by, for example, application of an appropriate electric potential, the counter electrode layer transfers some or all of the ions it holds to the
electrochromic layer, changing the electrochromic layer to the colored state. Concurrently, in the case of NiWO, the counter electrode layer colors with the loss of ions. [0072] In some embodiments, suitable materials for the counter electrode complementary to WO3 include nickel oxide (NiO), nickel tungsten oxide (NiWO), nickel vanadium oxide, nickel chromium oxide, nickel aluminum oxide, nickel manganese oxide, nickel magnesium oxide, chromium oxide (Cr2O3), manganese oxide (MnO2), and Prussian blue. [0073] When charge is removed from a counter electrode 310 made of nickel tungsten oxide (that is, ions are transported from counter electrode 310 to electrochromic layer 306), the counter electrode layer will transition from a transparent state to a colored state. [0074] In the depicted electrochromic device, between electrochromic layer 306 and counter electrode layer 310, there is the ion conducting layer 308. Ion conducting layer 308 serves as a medium through which ions are transported (in the manner of an electrolyte) when the electrochromic device transitions between the bleached state and the colored state. Preferably, ion conducting layer 308 is highly conductive to the relevant ions for the electrochromic and the counter electrode layers, but has sufficiently low electron conductivity that negligible electron transfer takes place during normal operation. A thin ion conducting layer with high ionic conductivity permits fast ion conduction and hence fast switching for high performance electrochromic devices. In certain embodiments, the ion conducting layer 308 is inorganic and/or solid. [0075] Examples of suitable ion conducting layers (for electrochromic devices having a distinct IC layer) include silicates, silicon oxides, tungsten oxides, tantalum oxides, niobium oxides, and borates. These materials may be doped with different dopants, including lithium. Lithium doped silicon oxides include lithium silicon-aluminum-oxide. In some embodiments, the ion conducting layer includes a silicate-based structure. In some embodiments, a silicon-aluminum-oxide (SiAlO) is used for the ion conducting layer 308. [0076] Electrochromic device 300 may include one or more additional layers (not shown), such as one or more passive layers. Passive layers used to improve certain optical properties may be included in electrochromic device 300. Passive layers for providing moisture or scratch resistance may also be included in electrochromic device 300. For example, the conductive layers may be treated with anti-reflective or protective oxide or
nitride layers. Other passive layers may serve to hermetically seal electrochromic device 300. [0077] FIG.3B is a schematic cross-section of an electrochromic device in a bleached state (or transitioning to a bleached state). In accordance with specific embodiments, an electrochromic device 400 includes a tungsten oxide electrochromic layer (EC) 406 and a nickel-tungsten oxide counter electrode layer (CE) 410. Electrochromic device 400 also includes a substrate 402, a conductive layer (CL) 404, an ion conducting layer (IC) 408, and conductive layer (CL) 414. [0078] A power source 416 is configured to apply a potential and/or current to an electrochromic stack 420 through suitable connections (e.g., bus bars) to the conductive layers 404 and 414. In some embodiments, the voltage source is configured to apply a potential of a few volts in order to drive a transition of the device from one optical state to another. The polarity of the potential as shown in FIG.3B is such that the ions (lithium ions in this example) primarily reside (as indicated by the dashed arrow) in nickel- tungsten oxide counter electrode layer 410 [0079] FIG.3C is a schematic cross-section of electrochromic device 400 shown in FIG.3B but in a colored state (or transitioning to a colored state). In FIG.3C, the polarity of voltage source 416 is reversed, so that the electrochromic layer is made more positive to accept additional lithium ions, and thereby transition to the colored state. As indicated by the dashed arrow, lithium ions are transported across ion conducting layer 408 to tungsten oxide electrochromic layer 406. Tungsten oxide electrochromic layer 406 is shown in the colored state. Nickel-tungsten oxide counter electrode 410 is also shown in the colored state. As explained, nickel-tungsten oxide becomes progressively more opaque as it gives up (deintercalates) lithium ions. In this example, there is a synergistic effect where the transition to colored states for both layers 406 and 410 are additive toward reducing the amount of light transmitted through the stack and substrate. [0080] As described above, an electrochromic device may include an electrochromic (EC) layer and a counter electrode (CE) layer separated by an ionically conductive (IC) layer that is highly conductive to ions and highly resistive to electrons. As conventionally understood, the ionically conductive layer therefore prevents shorting between the electrochromic layer and the counter electrode layer. The ionically conductive layer allows the electrochromic and counter electrode layers to hold a charge and thereby maintain their bleached or colored states. In electrochromic devices having distinct layers, the components form a stack which includes the ion conducting layer sandwiched
between the electrochromic electrode layer and the counter electrode layer. The boundaries between these three stack components are defined by abrupt changes in composition and/or microstructure. Thus, the devices have three distinct layers with two abrupt interfaces. [0081] In accordance with certain embodiments, the counter electrode and electrochromic layers are formed immediately adjacent one another, sometimes in direct contact, without separately depositing an ionically conducting layer. In some embodiments, electrochromic devices having an interfacial region rather than a distinct IC layer are employed. Such devices, and methods of fabricating them, are described in U.S. Patent No.8,300,298 and U.S. Patent Application Serial Number12/772, 075 filed on April 30, 2010, and U.S. Patent Applications Serial Numbers 12/814,277 and 12/814,279, filed on June 11, 2010 – each of the three patent applications and patent is entitled “Electrochromic Devices,” each names Zhongchun Wang et al. as inventors, and each is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. B. Window Controllers [0082] A window controller may be used to control tinting of a tintable window. For example, a window controller in communication may be utilized to adjust the tint level, and associated transmissivity, of an electrochromic window. In some embodiments, the window controller is able to transition the electrochromic window between multiple tint states (levels) including a bleached state and a colored state. In one aspect, a window controller is able to transition an electrochromic window to any one of four tint levels (including the bleached state and the colored state). In another aspect, a window controller is able to transition an electrochromic window to any one of four or more tint levels. [0083] In some embodiments, an electrochromic window can include an electrochromic device (e.g., electrochromic device 400) on one lite of an IGU (e.g., IGU device 200) and another electrochromic device (e.g., electrochromic device 400) on the other lite of the IGU. If the window controller is able to transition each electrochromic device between two states, a bleached state and a colored state, the electrochromic window is able to attain four different states (tint levels), a colored state with both electrochromic devices being colored, a first intermediate state with one electrochromic device being colored, a second intermediate state with the other electrochromic device being colored, and a bleached state with both electrochromic devices being bleached. Embodiments of multi-
pane electrochromic windows are further described in U.S. Patent Number 8,270,059, naming Robin Friedman et al. as inventors, titled “MULTI-PANE ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS,” which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. [0084] In some embodiments, the window controller is able to transition an electrochromic window having an electrochromic device capable of transitioning between two or more tint levels. For example, a window controller may be able to transition the electrochromic window to a bleached state, one or more intermediate levels, and a colored state. In some other embodiments, the window controller is able to transition an electrochromic window incorporating an electrochromic device between any number of tint levels between the bleached state and the colored state. Embodiments of methods and controllers for transitioning an electrochromic window to an intermediate tint level or levels are further described in U.S. Patent Number 8,254,013, naming Disha Mehtani et al. as inventors, titled “CONTROLLING TRANSITIONS IN OPTICALLY SWITCHABLE DEVICES,” which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. [0085] In some embodiments, a window controller can power one or more electrochromic devices in an electrochromic window. Typically, this function of the window controller is augmented with one or more other functions described in more detail below. Window controllers described herein are not limited to those that have the function of powering an electrochromic device to which it is associated for the purposes of control. That is, the power source for the electrochromic window may be separate from the window controller, where the controller has its own power source and directs application of power from the window power source to the window. However, it is convenient to include a power source with the window controller and to configure the controller to power the window directly, because it obviates the need for separate wiring for powering the electrochromic window. [0086] Further, the window controllers described in this section are described as standalone controllers which may be configured to control the functions of a single window or a plurality of electrochromic windows, without integration of the window controller into a building control network or a building management system (BMS). Window controllers, however, may be integrated into a building control network or a BMS. [0087] FIG.4 depicts a simplified block diagram of some components of a window controller 450 and other components of a window controller system of disclosed embodiments. More detail of components of window controllers can be found in U.S.
Patent Application Serial numbers 13/449,248 and 13/449,251, both naming Stephen Brown as inventor, both titled “CONTROLLER FOR OPTICALLY-SWITCHABLE WINDOWS,” and both filed on April 17, 2012, and in U.S. Patent Serial Number 13/449,235, titled “CONTROLLING TRANSITIONS IN OPTICALLY SWITCHABLE DEVICES,” naming Stephen Brown et al. as inventors and filed on April 17, 2012, all of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties. [0088] In FIG.4, the illustrated components of the window controller 450 include a microprocessor 455 or other processor, a pulse width modulator 460, one or more input 465, and a computer readable medium 470 (e.g., memory) having a configuration file 475. Window controller 450 is in electronic communication with one or more electrochromic devices 400 in an electrochromic window through network 480 (wired or wireless) to send instructions to the one or more electrochromic devices 400. In some embodiments, the window controller 450 may be a local window controller in communication through a network (wired or wireless) to a master window controller. [0089] In disclosed embodiments, window controller 450 can instruct the PWM 460, to apply a voltage and/or current to electrochromic window 502 to transition it to any one of four or more different tint levels. In disclosed embodiments, electrochromic window 502 can be transitioned to at least eight different tint levels described as: 0 (lightest), 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, and 35 (darkest). The tint levels may linearly correspond to visual transmittance values and solar heat gain coefficient (SHGC) values of light transmitted through the electrochromic window 502. For example, using the above eight tint levels, the lightest tint level of 0 may correspond to an SHGC value of 0.80, the tint level of 5 may correspond to an SHGC value of 0.70, the tint level of 10 may correspond to an SHGC value of 0.60, the tint level of 15 may correspond to an SHGC value of 0.50, the tint level of 20 may correspond to an SHGC value of 0.40, the tint level of 25 may correspond to an SHGC value of 0.30, the tint level of 30 may correspond to an SHGC value of 0.20, and the tint level of 35 (darkest) may correspond to an SHGC value of 0.10. [0090] Window controller 450 or a master controller in communication with the window controller 450 may employ any one or more control logic components to determine a desired tint level based on signals from the exterior sensor 510 and/or other input. The window controller 450 can instruct the PWM 460 to apply a voltage and/or current to electrochromic window 502 to transition it to the desired tint level.
[0091] It should be understood that control logic and other logic used to implement techniques described above can be implemented in the form of circuits, processors (including general purpose microprocessors, digital signal processors, application specific integrated circuits, programmable logic such as field-programmable gate arrays, etc.), computers, computer software, devices such as sensors, or combinations thereof. Based on the disclosure and teachings provided herein, a person of ordinary skill in the art will know and appreciate other ways and/or methods to implement the disclosed techniques using hardware and/or a combination of hardware and software. [0092] Any of the components or functions of software, firmware, or machine- instructions described in this application, may be implemented as code to be executed by a processor using any suitable computer language such as, for example, Java, C++ or Python using, for example, conventional or object-oriented techniques. The code may be stored as a series of instructions, or commands on a computer or machine readable medium, such as a random-access memory (RAM), a read only memory (ROM), a programmable memory (EEPROM), a magnetic medium such as a hard-drive or a floppy disk, or an optical medium such as a CD-ROM. Any such computer or machine readable medium may reside on or within a single computational apparatus, and may be present on or within different computational apparatuses within a system or network. In some implementations, the computer or machine readable medium is a non-transitory medium. [0093] In some embodiments disclosed herein, one or more electrochromic devices are operatively coupled to at least one controller and/or processor. A controller may comprise a processing unit (e.g., CPU or GPU). A controller may receive an input (e.g., from at least one device or projected media). The controller may comprise circuitry, electrical wiring, optical wiring, socket, and/or outlet. A controller may receive an input and/or deliver an output. A controller may comprise multiple (e.g., sub-) controllers. An operation (e.g., as disclosed herein) may be performed by a single controller or by a plurality of controllers. At least two operations may be each preconformed by a different controller. At least two operations may be preconformed by the same controller. A device and/or media may be controlled by a single controller or by a plurality of controllers. At least two devices and/or media may be controlled by a different controller. At least two devices and/or media may be controlled by the same controller. The controller may be a part of a control system. The control system may comprise a master controller, floor (e.g., comprising network controller) controller, or a local controller. The local controller may be a target controller. For example, the local controller may be a window controller (e.g.,
controlling a tintable window), enclosure controller, or component controller. The controller may be a part of a hierarchal control system. The hierarchal control system may comprise a main controller that directs one or more controllers, e.g., floor controllers, local controllers (e.g., window controllers), enclosure controllers, and/or component controllers. The target may comprise a device or a media. The device may comprise an electrochromic window, a sensor, an emitter, an antenna, a receiver, a transceiver, or an actuator. [0094] In some examples, a controlled apparatus is a tintable window (e.g., an electrochromic window). In some embodiments, a dynamic state of an electrochromic window is controlled by altering a voltage signal to an electrochromic device (ECD) used to provide tinting or coloring. An electrochromic window can be manufactured, configured, or otherwise provided as an insulated glass unit (IGU). IGUs may serve as the fundamental constructs for holding electrochromic panes (also referred to as “lites”) when provided for installation in a building. An IGU lite or pane may be a single substrate or a multi-substrate construct, such as a laminate of two substrates. [0095] The controller may be implemented in an electronic device in various forms of digital computers such as a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a workstation, a personal digital assistant, a server, a blade server, a mainframe computer, and other appropriate computers. The electronic device may also represent various forms of mobile apparatuses such as personal digital assistant, a cellular telephone, a smart phone, a wearable device and other similar computing apparatuses. The parts shown herein, their connections and relationships, and their functions are only as examples, and not intended to limit implementations of the present disclosure as described and/or claimed herein. [0096] In some implementations, the controller is coupled to memory, such as a non- transitory computer-readable or machine-readable medium. The memory stores instructions for the controller to operate a ECD using methods disclosed herein. In some implementations, the controller comprises a processor. The memory, as a non-transitory computer readable storage medium, may be used to store non-transitory software programs, non-transitory computer executable programs and modules, such as program instructions/modules corresponding to the method for controlling an ECD in the embodiments of the present disclosure. The processor executes the non-transitory software programs, instructions, and modules stored in the memory to execute various functional applications and data processing.
[0097] The memory may include a storage program area and a storage data area, where the storage program area may store an operating system and at least one function required application program; and the storage data area may store data created by the use of the electronic device according to the disclosed methods. In addition, the memory may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-transitory memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, a flash memory device, or other non-transitory solid-state storage devices. In some embodiments, the memory may optionally include memories remotely provided with respect to the processor, and these remote memories may be connected to the electronic device of the method for controller the ECD. Examples of the above network include but are not limited to the Internet, intranet, local area network, mobile communication network, and combinations thereof. [0098] Examples of tintable windows, window controllers, their methods of use and their features are presented in U.S. Patent Application Serial No.15/334,832, filed October 26, 2016, titled “CONTROLLERS FOR OPTICALLY-SWITCHABLE DEVICES,” and U.S. Patent Application Serial No.16/082,793, filed September 6, 2018, titled “METHOD OF COMMISSIONING ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS,” each of which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety. [0099] FIG.5 is a schematic depiction of a control system 500 for controlling and driving a plurality of tintable windows 502 of a building 504. It may be employed to control the operation of one or more devices associated with a tintable window such as a window antenna. The system 500 can be adapted for use with facility (e.g., a building 504) comprising a commercial office building or a residential building. In this example, the system 500 is designed to function in conjunction with modern heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC) systems 506, interior lighting systems 507, security systems 508, and power systems 509 as a single holistic and efficient energy control system for the entire building 504, or a campus of buildings 504. The system 500 also includes a building management system (BMS) 510. The BMS 510 is a computer-based control system that can be installed in a building to monitor and control the building’s mechanical and electrical equipment such as HVAC systems, lighting systems, power systems, elevators, fire systems, and security systems. The BMS 510 can include hardware and associated firmware or software for maintaining conditions in the building 504 according to preferences set by the occupants or by a building manager or other administrator. The software can be based on, for example, internet protocols or open standards.
[0100] A BMS can be used in large buildings where it functions to control the environment within the building. For example, the BMS 510 may control lighting, temperature, carbon dioxide levels, and/or humidity within the building 504. There can be several (e.g., numerous) mechanical and/or electrical devices that are controlled by the BMS 510 including, for example, furnaces or other heaters, air conditioners, blowers, and/or vents. To control the building environment, the BMS 510 can turn on and off these various devices, e.g., according to rules and/or in response to conditions. Such rules and/or conditions may be selected and/or specified by a user (e.g., building manager and/or administrator). One function of the BMS 510 may be to maintain a comfortable environment for the occupants of the building 504, e.g., while minimizing heating and cooling energy losses and costs. In some embodiments, the BMS 510 is configured not (e.g., only) to monitor and control, but also to optimize the synergy between various systems, for example, to conserve energy and lower building operation costs. The illustrated example also depicts clouds 503. [0101] Some embodiments are designed to function responsively or reactively based on feedback. The feedback control scheme may comprise measurements sensed through, for example, thermal, optical, or other sensors. The feedback control scheme may comprise input from an HVAC, interior lighting system, and/or an input from a user control. Examples of control system, methods of its use, and its related software, may be found in US Patent No.8,705,162, issued April 22, 2014, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. Some embodiments are utilized in existing structures, including commercial and/or residential structures, e.g., having traditional or conventional HVAC and/or interior lighting systems. Some embodiments are retrofitted for use in older facilities (e.g., residential homes). [0102] The system 500 includes network controllers (NCs) 512 configured to control a plurality of window controllers 514. For example, one network controller 512 may control at least tens, hundreds, or thousands of window controllers 514. Each window controller 514, in turn, may control and drive one or more electrochromic windows 502. In some embodiments, the network controller 512 can issue high level instructions such as the final tint state of a tintable window. The window controllers may receive these commands and directly control their associated windows, e.g., by applying electrical stimuli to appropriately drive tint state transitions and/or maintain tint states. The number and size of the tintable (e.g., electrochromic) windows 502 that each window controller 514 can drive, may be generally limited by the voltage and/or current characteristics of
the load on the window controller 514 controlling the respective electrochromic windows 502. In some embodiments, the maximum window size that the window controller 514 can drive is limited by the voltage, current, and/or power requirements, to cause the requested optical transitions in the electrochromic window 502 within a requested time- frame. Such requirements are, in turn, a function of the surface area of the window. In some embodiments, this relationship is nonlinear. For example, the voltage, current, and/or power requirements can increase nonlinearly with the surface area of the electrochromic window 502. Without wishing to be bound to theory, in some cases the relationship is nonlinear at least in part because the sheet resistance of the first and second conductive layers increases nonlinearly with distance across the length and width of the first or second conductive layers. In some embodiments, the relationship between the voltage, current, and/or power requirements required to drive multiple electrochromic windows 502 of equal size and shape is directly proportional to the number of the electrochromic windows 502 being driven. [0103] FIG.5 shows an example of a master controller (MC) 511. The master controller 511 communicates and functions in conjunction with multiple network controllers 512, each of which network controllers 512 is capable of addressing a plurality of window controllers 514. In some embodiments, the master controller 511 issues the high level instructions (such as the final tint states of the tintable windows) to the network controllers 512, and the network controllers 512 then communicate the instructions to the corresponding window controllers 514. FIG.5 shows an example of a hierarchical control system comprising the master controller, the network controllers, and the window controllers. [0104] In some implementations, the various electrochromic windows 502, antennas, and/or other target devices of the facility (e.g., comprising building or other structure) are (e.g., advantageously) grouped into zones or groups of zones (e.g., wherein each of which includes a subset of the electrochromic windows 502). For example, each zone may correspond to a set of electrochromic windows 502 in a specific location or area of the facility that should be tinted (or otherwise transitioned) to the same or similar optical states, based at least in part on their location. As another example, consider a building having four faces or sides: A North face, a South face, an East Face, and a West Face. Consider that the building has ten floors. In such an example, each zone can correspond to the set of electrochromic windows 502 on a particular floor and on a particular one of the four faces. In some such embodiments, each network controller 512 can address one
or more zones or groups of zones. For example, the master controller 511 can issue a final tint state command for a particular zone or group of zones to a respective one or more of the network controllers 512. For example, the final tint state command can include an abstract identification of each of the target zones. The designated network controllers 512 receiving the final tint state command may then map the abstract identification of the zone(s) to the specific network addresses of the respective window controllers 514 that control the voltage or current profiles to be applied to the electrochromic windows 502 in the zone(s). [0105] In some embodiments, a distributed network of controllers is used to control one or more tintable windows. For example, a network system may be operable to control a plurality of IGUs in accordance with some implementations. One primary function of the network system may be to control the optical states of the electrochromic devices (or other optically-switchable devices) within the IGUs. [0106] In some embodiments, another function of the network system is to acquire status information (e.g., data) from the IGUs. For example, the status information for a given IGU can include an identification of, or information about, a current tint state of the tintable device(s) within the IGU. The network system may be operable to acquire data from various sensors, such as temperature sensors, photosensors (referred to herein as light sensors), humidity sensors, air flow sensors, or occupancy sensors, antennas, whether integrated on or within the IGUs or located at various other positions in, on or around the building. At least one sensor may be configured (e.g., designed) to measure one or more environmental characteristics, for example, temperature, humidity, ambient noise, carbon dioxide, VOC, particulate matter, oxygen, and/or any other aspects of an environment (e.g., atmosphere thereof). The sensors may comprise electromagnetic sensors. [0107] The electromagnetic sensor may be configured to sense ultraviolet, visible, infrared, and/or radio wave radiation. The infrared radiation may be passive infrared radiation (e.g., black body radiation). The electromagnetic sensor may sense radio waves. The radio waves may comprise wide band, or ultra-wideband radio signals. The radio waves may comprise pulse radio waves. The radio waves may comprise radio waves utilized in communication. The radio waves may be at a medium frequency of at least about 300 kilohertz (KHz), 500 KHz, 800 KHz, 1000 KHz, 1500 KHz, 2000 KHz, or 2500 KHz. The radio waves may be at a medium frequency of at most about 500 KHz, 800 KHz, 1000 KHz, 1500 KHz, 2000 KHz, 2500 KHz, or 3000 KHz. The radio waves
may be at any frequency between the aforementioned frequency ranges (e.g., from about 300KHz to about 3000 KHz). The radio waves may be at a high frequency of at least about 3 megahertz (MHz), 5 MHz, 8 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, 20 MHz, or 25 MHz. The radio waves may be at a high frequency of at most about 5 MHz, 8 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, 20 MHz, 25 MHz, or 30 MHz. The radio waves may be at any frequency between the aforementioned frequency ranges (e.g., from about 3MHz to about 30 MHz). The radio waves may be at a very high frequency of at least about 30 Megahertz (MHz), 50 MHz, 80 MHz, 100 MHz, 150 MHz, 200 MHz, or 250 MHz. The radio waves may be at a very high frequency of at most about 50 MHz, 80 MHz, 100 MHz, 150 MHz, 200 MHz, 250 MHz, or 300 MHz. The radio waves may be at any frequency between the aforementioned frequency ranges (e.g., from about 30MHz to about 300 MHz). The radio waves may be at an ultra-high frequency of at least about 300 kilohertz (MHz), 500 MHz, 800 MHz, 1000 MHz, 1500 MHz, 2000 MHz, or 2500 MHz. The radio waves may be at an ultra-high frequency of at most about 500 MHz, 800 MHz, 1000 MHz, 1500 MHz, 2000 MHz, 2500 MHz, or 3000 MHz. The radio waves may be at any frequency between the aforementioned frequency ranges (e.g., from about 300MHz to about 3000 MHz). The radio waves may be at a super high frequency of at least about 3 gigahertz (GHz), 5 GHz, 8 GHz, 10 GHz, 15 GHz, 20 GHz, or 25 GHz. The radio waves may be at a super high frequency of at most about 5 GHz, 8 GHz, 10 GHz, 15 GHz, 20 GHz, 25 GHz, or 30 GHz. The radio waves may be at any frequency between the aforementioned frequency ranges (e.g., from about 3GHz to about 30 GHz). [0108] The network system may include any suitable number of distributed controllers having various capabilities or functions. In some embodiments, the functions and arrangements of the various controllers are defined hierarchically. [0109] FIG.6 shows an example of a network system 600 including a plurality of distributed local window controllers (WCs) 604, a plurality of network controllers (NCs) 606, and a master controller (MC) 608. In some embodiments, the MC 608 can communicate with and control at least two, ten, tens, hundred, or hundreds of floors using network controllers 606. The floor controller may be configured to control a floor or a portion of a floor. In various embodiments, the master controller MC 608 issues high level instructions to the NCs 606 over one or more wired and/or wireless communication links. The instructions can include, for example, tint commands for causing transitions in the optical states of the IGUs controlled by the respective NCs 606. Each NC 606 may, in turn, communicate with and control a number of window controllers 604 over one or
more wired and/or wireless links. The communication links may be bidirectional communication links. Master controller 608 is also in communication with a database 620, and a building management system 624. The databased 620 and BMS 624 are in communication with an external source 610. In one implementation, external source 610 includes one or more sensors (e.g., a plurality of photosensors) and/or a cloud network. [0110] The MC 608 may issue communications including tint commands, status request commands, data (for example, sensor data) request commands or other instructions. In some embodiments, the MC 608 issues such communications periodically, at certain predefined times of day (which may change based on the day of week or year), or based at least in part on the detection of particular events, conditions or combinations of events or conditions (for example, as determined by acquired sensor data or based at least in part on the receipt of a request initiated by a user and/or by an application or a combination of such sensor data and such a request). In some embodiments, when the MC 608 determines to cause a tint state change (e.g., alteration) in a set of one or more IGUs, the MC 608 generates or selects a tint value corresponding to the requested tint state. In some implementations, the set of IGUs is associated with a first protocol identifier (ID) (for example, a Building Automation and Control (BAC) network identification (BACnet ID)). The MC 608 may then generate and transmit a communication—referred to herein as a “primary tint command”— including the tint value and the first protocol ID over the link via a first communication protocol (for example, a BACnet compatible protocol). In some embodiments, the MC 608 addresses the primary tint command to the particular NC 606 that controls the particular one or more WCs 604 that, in turn, control the set of IGUs to be transitioned. The NC 606 may receive the primary tint command including the tint value and the first protocol ID and map the first protocol ID to one or more second protocol IDs. In some embodiments, each of the second protocol IDs identifies a corresponding one of the WCs 604. The NC 606 may subsequently transmit a secondary tint command including the tint value to each of the identified WCs 604 over the link via a second communication protocol. In some embodiments, each of the WCs 604 that receives the secondary tint command then selects a voltage and/or current profile from an internal memory based on the tint value to drive its respectively connected IGUs to a tint state consistent with the tint value. Each of the WCs 304 may then generate and provide voltage and/or current signals over the link to its respectively connected IGUs to apply the voltage or current profile.
[0111] In a similar manner to how the function and/or arrangement of controllers may be arranged hierarchically, tintable windows may be arranged in a hierarchical structure. A hierarchical structure can help facilitate the control of tintable windows at a particular site by allowing rules or user control to be applied to various groupings of tintable windows or IGUs. Further, for aesthetics, multiple contiguous windows in a room and/or other site location may sometimes need to have their optical states correspond and/or tint at the same rate. Treating a group of contiguous windows as a zone can facilitate these goals. [0112] In some embodiments, IGUs are grouped into zones of tintable windows, each of which zones includes at least one window controller and its respective IGUs. Each zone of IGUs may be controlled by one or more respective NCs and one or more respective WCs controlled by these NCs. For example, each zone can be controlled by a single NC and two or more WCs controlled by the single NC. [0113] In some embodiments, at least one device is operated in coordination with at least one other device, which devices are coupled to the network. Control of the at least one device may be via Ethernet. For example, A tint level of tintable windows may be adjusted concurrently. When the devices are in use, a zone of devices may have at least one characteristic that is the same. For example, when the tintable windows are in a zone, a zone of tintable windows may have its tint level (automatically) altered (e.g., darkened or lightened) to the same level. For example, when sounds sensors are in a zone, they may sample sound at the same frequency and/or at the same time window. A zone of devices may comprise a plurality of devices (e.g., of the same type). The zone may comprise (i) devices (e.g., tintable windows) facing a particular direction of an enclosure (e.g., facility), (ii) a plurality of devices disposed on a particular face (e.g., façade) of the enclosure, (iii) devices on a particular floor of a facility, (iv) devices in a particular type of room and/or activity (e.g., open space, office, conference room, lecture hall, corridor, reception hall, or cafeteria), (v) devices disposed on the same fixture (e.g., internal or external wall), and/or (vi) devices that are user defined (e.g., a group of tintable windows in a room or on a façade that are a subset of a larger group of tintable windows. The (automatic) adjustment of the devices may done automatically and/or by a user. The automatic changing of device properties and/or status in a zone, may be overridden by a user (e.g., by manually adjusting the tint level). A user may override the automatic adjustment of the devices in a zone using mobile circuitry (e.g., a remote controller, a
virtual reality controller, a cellular phone, an electronic notepad, a laptop computer and/or by a similar mobile device). [0114] In some embodiments, when instructions relating to the control of a device (e.g., instructions for a window controller or a tintable window) are passed through the network system, they are accompanied with a unique network ID of the device they are sent to. Networks IDs may be helpful to ensure that instructions reach and are carried out on the intended device. For example, a window controller that controls the tint states of more than one IGU, may determine which IGU (tintable window) to control based upon a network ID such as a Controller Area Network (CAN) ID (a form of network ID) that is passed along with the tinting command. In a window network such as those described herein, the term network ID includes but is not limited to CAN IDs, and BACnet IDs. Such network IDs may be applied to window network nodes such as window controllers, network controllers, and master controllers. A network ID for a device may include the network ID of every device that controls it in the hierarchical structure. For example, the network ID of an IGU may include a window controller ID, a network controller ID, and a master controller ID in addition to its own CAN ID. [0115] FIG.7 shows various tintable windows (referred to as “IGUs”) 722 grouped into zones 703 of tintable windows. Each zone 703 includes at least one window controller 724 and one or more respective tintable windows 722. In some embodiments, each zone of tintable windows 722 is controlled by one or more respective NCs and one or more respective WCs 724 controlled by these NCs. Each zone 703 may be controlled by a single NC and two or more WCs 724 controlled by the single NC. Thus, a zone 703 can represent a logical grouping of the tintable windows 722. For example, each zone 703 may correspond to a set of one or more tintable windows 722 in a specific location or area of the building that are driven together based on their location or orientation. As a more specific example, consider a site 701 that is a building having ten floors and four faces or sides: A North face, a South face, an East Face, and a West Face. In such an example, each zone 703 may correspond to the set of one or more tintable windows 722 on a particular floor and on a particular one of the four faces. As another example, each zone 703 may correspond to a set of one or more tintable windows 722 that share one or more physical characteristics (for example, device parameters such as size or age). In some embodiments, a zone 703 of tintable windows 722 is grouped based at least in part on one or more non-physical characteristics comprising a security designation or a business hierarchy (for example, tintable windows 722 bounding managers’ offices can be grouped
in one or more zones while tintable windows 722 bounding non-managers’ offices can be grouped in one or more different zones). [0116] In some such implementations, each NC can address all of the tintable windows 722 in each of one or more respective zones 703. For example, the MC can issue a primary tint command to the NC that controls a target zone 703. The primary tint command can include an abstract identification of the target zone (hereinafter referred to as a “zone ID”). In some such implementations, the zone ID can be a first protocol ID such as that just described in the example above. The NC may receive the primary tint command including the tint value and the zone ID and may map the zone ID to the d protocol IDs associated with the WCs 724 within the zone. In some embodiments, the zone ID can be a higher level abstraction than the first protocol IDs. In such cases, the NC can first map the zone ID to one or more first protocol IDs, and subsequently map the first protocol IDs to the second protocol IDs. [0117] In order for tint controls to work (e.g., to allow the window control system to change the tint state of one or more specific tintable windows), a master controller, network controller, and/or other controller responsible for tint decisions, may utilize the network address of the window controller(s) connected to that specific window or set of windows. To this end, a function of commissioning may be used to provide correct assignment of window controller addresses and/or other identifying information to specific windows and window controllers, as well the physical locations of the windows and/or window controllers in buildings. In some embodiments, a goal of commissioning is to correct mistakes and/or other problems made in installing tintable windows in the wrong locations or connecting cables to the wrong window controllers. In some embodiments, a goal of commissioning is to provide semi- or fully automated installation. In other words, allowing installation with little or no location guidance for installers. [0118] In some embodiments, the commissioning process for a particular tintable window may involve associating an ID for a device (e.g., the tintable window and/or window-related component), with its corresponding local controller. The commissioning process may assign a building location, a relative location, and/or absolute location (e.g., latitude, longitude, and elevation) to the device (e.g., window or another component). Examples relating to commissioning and/or configuring a network of tintable windows can be found in U.S. Patent Application Serial No.14/391,122, filed October 7, 2014, titled “APPLICATIONS FOR CONTROLLING OPTICALLY SWITCHABLE DEVICES,” U.S. Patent Application Serial No.14/951,410, filed November 24, 2015,
titled “SELF-CONTAINED EC IGU,” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62/305,892, filed March 9, 2016, titled “METHOD OF COMMISSIONING ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS,” and U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62/370,174, filed August 2, 2016, titled “METHOD OF COMMISSIONING ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS,” each of which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety. [0119] After a network of devices (e.g., one or more tintable windows) is physically installed, the network can be commissioned to correct any incorrect assignment of window controllers to the wrong tintable windows (sometimes referred to as “IGUs”) or building locations. In some embodiments, commissioning maps pairs or links individual devices (e.g., tintable windows) and their locations with associated controllers. II. Additional Introduction [0120] Some tintable windows can be electronically controlled. Such control may allow control of the amount of light that passes through the tintable windows, and presents an opportunity for tintable windows to control the amount of natural light in spaces of a facility (e.g., a building), the heat load entering the facility, and other internal conditions of the facility by adjusting transmissivity of tintable windows on the skin of the facility and/or controlling settings of other systems (e.g., building systems such as an HVAC system) and their associated controllers. [0121] As used herein, a “space” refers to a volume within a facility that may serve a specific purpose. A space may be virtual space in a virtual representation of a facility such as a virtual model (e.g., digital twin) or a physical space of the facility. The spaces in a facility may have identifiers associated with the purpose of the space. An example of an identifier of a space is “Conference room A”, “Conference Room B”, or “Marketing Open Office.” A “space type” refers to an attribute of a space that indicates a function of the space. Some examples of space types in an office building include circulation, private office, open office, kitchen, conference room, breakroom, restaurant, fitness center, and lobby. Some examples of space types in an airport building include circulation, gate, restaurant, vendor, office, lounge, and service area. Some examples of space types in a multi-family house building include living room, kitchen, bedroom, bathroom, hallway, lobby, lounge, gym/fitness room, and office. [0122] Real-time control, or near (approximate) real-time control, of one or more conditions at a facility such as a building may be desired by customers of the facility
(e.g., tenants, other occupants, and/or customer support personnel for the facility). For example, an occupant spending time in a particular three-dimensional space of a building may desire real-time control of the light level (e.g., level of natural light and/or artificial light), color of light, heat load (gain), and/or other condition of their space. In addition, or alternatively, identification of a malfunctioning tintable window, sensor, or other device, a controller, and/or a connection of the controller to a particular device for maintenance, upgrade and/or replacement may be desired. [0123] Certain embodiments described herein control the amount of natural light in a space of a facility by adjusting transmissivity of the facility’s tintable windows based on clear sky illuminance values attenuated based on measured illuminance outside the facility. To create a desired or target natural light level in a facility’s space, given the light level outside the facility based on attenuated clear sky illuminance values, the transmissivity of the facility’s tintable windows can serve as an independent variable that is adjusted to modulate the amount of light that passes through such windows from outside the facility into the space. By adjusting the transmissivity, the target lux level, or an approximation close to this target, can be achieved. The transmissivity of the facility’s tintable windows serves as the adjustable variable (or adjustable “knob”) for tuning the amount of natural light passing from outside the facility, through the windows, and into the space. [0124] Some of these embodiments use illuminance levels outside the facility based at least in part on predicted light conditions (e.g., clear sky values) that are attenuated or adjusted based on sensor data from one or more sensors (e.g., photosensors) positioned outside the facility. The predicated clear sky data are attenuated with a scaling factor based on the measured sensor data; in some instances, this may be considered real-time external light with attenuated clear sky data. [0125] For example, clear sky data may represent external illuminance under clear sky conditions at a facility’s location and this predicted illuminance may be adjusted to account for real-time measured light conditions around the facility provided by sensors at the site of the facility such as on the roof of the facility. The measured illuminance may be used to determine a scaling factor applied to the predicated clear sky data, and by attenuating the by attenuating the predicted, outside light conditions with the measured real-time measurements, accurate light conditions can be used to control and adjust natural light in the space of the facility. In another example, the predicted illuminance may indicate illuminance at the facility emanating or originating from a southern compass
direction at a particular time (e.g., the sun is south of the facility), and none from the northern compass direction. The measured light data, as generated by a plurality of sensors, such as photosensors, may indicate measured illuminance from the northern compass direction; this measured illuminance may be caused by a cloud or building reflecting light at the facility from the northern compass direction. When these predicted light values are attenuated, or scaled, based on the measured light data, the resulting light conditions around the facility may indicate that light is radiating onto the building from both southern and northern directions. These scaled light conditions may then be used to optimize the facility’s tintable window transmissivities to cause the space or spaces in the facility to have their desired natural light levels given the outside light conditions. By using the known, measured light conditions outside a facility, the transmissivity of the facility’s tintable windows can be optimized to control the resulting natural light in a space of the facility. [0126] In some implementations, the predicted and measured illuminance outside the facility is simulated by light patches of a virtual sky dome over the facility. The light patches represent a luminance distribution that is based on predicted clear sky data and measured illuminance from the plurality of sensors. The sky above the facility is discretized into a plurality of light patches that make up the sky dome and each light patch has an associated lux level that represents a source or contribution of illuminance. Each light patch may be based on the predicted values which are attenuated by a scaling factor determined from the measured lux data received from the plurality of sensors. As provided herein, to attenuate the clear sky data in the sky dome model, sensor readings of measured light data from the one or more sensors are used to determine a scaling factor applied to the luminance values of the clear sky data for the light patches (luminous patches) of the sky dome; this may create a real-time sky dome with attenuated clear sky data. Some embodiments map the sensor readings and associated attenuated scaling factors to the patches of the sky dome. For example, as discussed in greater detail below, the measured light readings may be from 12 photosensors radially arranged around a central axis and oriented outward perpendicular to the central axis. Some of the embodiments provided herein may map the data generated by these 12 sensors to the patches in the sky dome. [0127] In alternative or additional embodiments, the transmissivity of a facility’s tintable windows may be used to adjust heat gain in a space of facility given the light
conditions outside the facility (e.g., predicted light adjusted by measured light data) to create a target heat gain, or approximation close to the target heat gain, in the space. III. Virtual Building Model (e.g., Digital Twin) [0128] To address customer satisfaction regarding control of conditions within a building and/or other settings and status of devices at a facility, a digital model and associated file(s) may be associated with the facility and the devices. In certain implementations, the digital model and its associated file(s) are referred to as a “virtual building model” of the facility. An example of virtual building model is a Building Information Model or “BIM”. Some examples of BIM files for a BIM model include a Revit file, a Microdesk file such as a ModelStream file, an IMAGINiT file, an ATG USA file, or similar facility-related digital file. The virtual building model may have associated centralized files integrating all assets at the facility, which can aid occupants and customer support personnel responsible for the facility and/or control of one or more devices within the facility. For example, the virtual building model can be stored in a cloud network accessible and/or updatable by the occupants and customer support personnel. [0129] In one aspect, a virtual building model may include the location and identifiers of the devices in the building and the current settings and status of the devices in the building. The virtual building model may also include user preferences such as, for example, preferred settings of one or more environmental conditions (e.g., amount of natural light in a space) and preferred settings for one or devices (e.g., transmissivity of a tintable window). In certain implementations, the virtual building model of a facility may be updated to reflect real time, or substantially real time status and settings, of the devices at the facility, which can aid in deployment, maintenance, and control of the devices and environmental conditions at the facility. The virtual building model can also serve as an interactive tool for customers to control in real time, or substantially real time, the environmental conditions (e.g., amount of natural light or heat load) in their space and see visualizations of their changes to environmental conditions on a three-dimensional model of the building and/or see visualizations on the three-dimensional model of the building of how their changes will cause adjustments to settings of devices in the building. For example, a customer can adjust an amount of light for their space and be provided with a visualization on a 3D model of how transmissivity of tintable windows on two adjacent facades to that space would be adjusted to accommodate their adjustment.
[0130] A virtual building model may facilitate management of control of devices at various levels. In certain aspects, a virtual building model may be a BIM that is supplemented with device related information such as through an app (software application). For example, input from customers (e.g., through an app) may be fed into control of the facility using the virtual building mode. The virtual building model may offer a visual proofing tool prior to commissioning or for purposes of maintenance after commissioning. The virtual building model may also offer a virtual reality experience of the facility (including its assets such as devices) to a user of the software application. [0131] In some cases, a three-dimensional (3D) architectural model may be used to initialize files (e.g., BIM files) of a virtual building model, to incorporate architectural elements of a facility. Ground truth validation (e.g., from a field service engineer) may be used to verify device data in the files of the virtual building model. The virtual building model may be initialized prior to commissioning the devices at the facility. In some cases, the initialized BIM files (such as, e.g., an Autodesk Revit file) incorporate architectural elements of a facility, but not the devices installed in the facility. The BIM files may be updated during commissioning and/or updated by the occupants and or customer support personnel. [0132] During commissioning of devices at a facility, devices may be installed and differentiated from one another by the installer, e.g., by consulting an external label having an inscribed serial number, bar code, Quick Response (QR) code, radio frequency identification (RF ID), and/or other printed information. In some cases, the process of locating and documenting the devices during and/or after the commissioning process may be entered into the virtual building model by automated and/or manual process. In some cases, commissioning may be performed to provide or correct assignment of window controller addresses and/or other identifying information to specific windows and window controllers, as well the physical locations of the windows and/or window controllers in buildings. For example, commissioning may be used to correct problems made in installing tintable windows in the wrong locations or the connecting of cables to the wrong window controllers. The commissioning process for a particular tintable window involve associating an identification (ID) for the window, or other window-related component, with a network address of its corresponding window controller. The process may (e.g., also) assign a building location and/or absolute location (e.g., latitude, longitude and/or elevation) to the window or other component.
[0133] The tintable windows (e.g., comprising electrochromic devices), electronic ensembles (e.g., containing various sensors, actuators, and/or communication interfaces), and/or associated controllers (e.g., master controllers, network controllers, and/or other controllers, e.g., responsible for tint decisions) may be interconnected in a hierarchical network, e.g., for purposes of coordinated control (e.g., monitoring). For example, one or more controllers may need to utilize the network address of the window controller(s) connected to specific windows or sets of windows. To this end, a function of commissioning may be to provide correct assignment of window controller addresses and/or other identifying information to specific windows and window controllers, as well the physical locations of the windows and/or window controllers in buildings. Another function of commissioning may be to correct the installation of windows at the wrong location or the connecting of cables to the wrong window controllers. The commissioning process for a particular window (e.g., insulated glass unit (IGU)) may involve associating an identification (ID) for the window, or other window-related component, with a network address of its corresponding window controller. The process may (e.g., also) assign a building location and/or absolute location (e.g., latitude, longitude and/or elevation) to the window or other component. Some examples to digital twins are described in PCT Application PCT/US2021/057678, filed on November 2, 2021, and titled “VIRTUALLY VIEWING DEVICES IN A FACILITY,” which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. [0134] In certain aspects, a control system and/or control interface comprises, or is in communication with, a “virtual building model” of a facility such as a building. For example, the virtual building model may comprise a representative model (e.g., a two- dimensional or three-dimensional virtual depiction) containing structural elements (e.g., walls and doors), building fixtures/furnishings, and one or more interactive target devices (e.g., tintable windows, sensors, emitters, and/or media displays). The virtual building model may reside on a server which is accessible via a graphical user interface, or which can be accessed using a virtual reality (VR) user interface. The VR interface may include an augmented reality (AR) aspect. The virtual building model may be utilized in connection with monitoring and servicing of the building infrastructure and/or in connection with controlling any interactive target devices, and in providing interactive input (e.g., preferences for one or more environmental settings) from, and feedback to, a customer.
[0135] When a new device is installed in the facility (e.g., in a room or space thereof) and is operatively coupled to the network, the new device may be detected (e.g., and included into the virtual building model). The detection of the new device and/or inclusion of the new device into the virtual building model may be done automatically and/or manually. For example, the detection of the new device and/or inclusion of the new device into the virtual building model may be without requiring (e.g., any) manual intervention. Whether present in the original design plans of the enclosure or added at a later time, full details regarding (e.g., each) device (including any unique identification codes) may be stored in the virtual building model, network configuration file, interconnect drawing, and/or architectural drawing (e.g., BIM file such as a Revit file) to facilitate the monitoring, servicing, and/or control functions. [0136] In some embodiments, a virtual building model comprises a virtual three dimensional (3D) model of the facility. The facility may include static and/or dynamic elements. For example, the static elements may include representations of a structural feature of the facility (e.g., fixtures) and the dynamic elements may include representations of an interactive device with a controllable feature. The 3D model may include visual elements. The visual elements may represent facility fixture(s). The fixture may comprise a wall, a floor, wall, door, shelf, a structural (e.g., walk-in) closet, a fixed lamp, electrical panel, elevator shaft, or a window. The fixtures may be affixed to the structure. The visual elements may represent non-fixture(s). The non-fixtures may comprise a person, a chair, a movable lamp, a table, a sofa, a movable closet, or a media projection. The non-fixtures may comprise mobile elements. The visual elements may represent facility features comprising a floor, wall, door, window, furniture, appliance, people, and/or interactive device(s)). The virtual building model may be similar to virtual worlds used in computer gaming and simulations, representing the environment of the real facility. Creation of a 3D model may include the analysis of a Building Information Modeling (BIM) model (e.g., an Autodesk Revit file), e.g., to derive a representation of (e.g., basic) fixed structures and movable items such as doors, windows, and elevators. In some embodiments, the virtual building model is defined at least in part by using one or more sensors (e.g., optical, acoustic, pressure, gas velocity, and/or distance measuring sensor(s)), to determine the layout of the real facility. Usage of sensor data can be used (e.g., exclusively) to model the environment of the enclosure. Usage of sensor data can be used in conjunction with a 3D model of the facility (e.g., (BIM model) to model and/or control the environment of the enclosure. The BIM model of the facility may be obtained
before, during (e.g., in real time), and/or after the facility has been constructed. The BIM model of the facility can be updated (e.g., manually and/or using the sensor data) during operation and/or commissioning of the facility (e.g., in real time). [0137] In some embodiments, dynamic elements in a virtual building model include device settings. The device setting may comprise (e.g., existing and/or predetermined): tint values, temperature settings, and/or light switch settings. The device settings may comprise available actions in media displays. The available actions may comprise menu items or hotspots in displayed content. The virtual building model may include virtual representation of the device and/or of movable objects (e.g., chairs or doors), and/or occupants (actual images from a camera or from stored avatars). In some embodiments, the dynamic elements can be devices that are newly plugged into the network, and/or disappear from the network (e.g., due to a malfunction or relocation). The virtual building model can reside in any circuitry (e.g., processor) operatively coupled to the network. The circuitry in which the digital circuitry resides may be in the facility, outside of the facility, and/or in the cloud. In some embodiments, a two-way (e.g., bidirectional) link is maintained between the virtual building model and a real circuitry. The real circuitry may be part of the control system. The real circuitry may be included in the master controller, network controller, floor controller, local controller, or in any other node in a processing system (e.g., in the facility or outside of the facility). For example, the two-way link can be used by the real circuitry to inform the virtual building model of changes in the dynamic and/or static elements so that the 3D representation of the enclosure can be updated, e.g., in real time or at a later (e.g., designated) time. The two-way link may be used by the virtual building model to inform the real circuitry of manipulative (e.g., control) actions entered by a user on a mobile circuitry. The mobile circuitry can be a remote controller (e.g., comprising a handheld pointer, manual input buttons, or touchscreen). [0138] FIG.8 depicts a visual representation of a virtual building model 800 which is based, at least in part, on a BIM (e.g., Revit) file 801. In some embodiments, virtual building model 800 includes a 3D virtual construct which may be virtually navigated to view and interact with target devices using an interface device. The interface may be a mobile device such as a smartphone or a tablet computer. In some embodiments, a virtual representation of the enclosure comprises a virtual augmented reality representation of the virtual building model displayed on the mobile device, wherein the virtual augmented reality representation includes virtual representations of at least some of the real target
devices. The navigation within the virtual building model using a mobile device may be independent of the actual location of the mobile device, or may coincide with the movement of the mobile device within the real enclosure represented by the virtual building model. The mobile device may be operatively (e.g., communicatively) coupled to the network. The mobile device may register its present position in the real facility with a respective position in the virtual building model, e.g., using any geo-location technology. For example, the geo-location anchors coupled to the network. [0139] In some embodiments, a mobile device (e.g., a smartphone, tablet, or handheld controller) is utilized to detect commissioning data of respective target devices and transmit the commissioning data to the virtual building model and/or BIM system. The mobile device may include geographic tracking capability (e.g., GPS, UWB, Bluetooth, and/or dead-reckoning) so that location coordinates of the mobile device can be transmitted to the virtual building model using any suitable network connection established by the user between the mobile device and the virtual building model. For example, a network connection may at least partly include the transport links used by a hierarchical controller network within a facility. The network connection may be (e.g., entirely) separate from the controller network of the facility (e.g., using a wireless network such as a cellular network). The target device may be outfitted with an optically recognizable ID tag (e.g., sticker with a barcode or a Quick Response (QR) code). Interaction of the mobile device with the target device may be used to populate a virtual representation of the target device in the virtual building model, with a unique identification code and/or other information relating to the target device that is associated with the ID code (e.g., comprised in the ID tag). [0140] FIG.9 shows an example embodiment of a control system 900 in which a real, physical building 910 includes a controller network 920 for managing and controlling interactive network devices (e.g., one or more tintable windows). The controller network 920 includes one or more controllers such as, for example, one or more of a master controller comprising a processor, a network controller, and local controller. The structure and contents of building 910 are represented in a 3-D model virtual building model 930 as part of a modeling and/or simulation system executed to manage computing assets at the building 910 and/or control one or more environmental conditions at the building 910. The computing assets may be co-located with or remote from building 910 and/or the controller network 920.
[0141] In the illustrated example, network link 940 is connecting controller network 920 with an interactive target device 912 (e.g., a tintable window such as an electrochromic window). Interactive target device 912 is represented as a virtual object 932 within virtual building model 930. A network link 940 in building 910 connects the controller network 920 with a plurality of network nodes including one or more network interactive target computing devices. In the illustrated example, network link 940 is connecting controller network 920 with an interactive target device 912. Interactive target device 912 is represented as a virtual object 932 within virtual building model 930. A network link 950 connects controller network 920 with virtual building model 930. In the illustrated example, a customer 914 is shown located in building 900 and in communication with a mobile device (e.g., handheld control unit) 916. Building 900 includes a physical space 918 associated with customer 914. Physical space 918 in the building 910 is represented by a virtual space 938 in virtual building model 930. In certain implementations, physical tintable windows in physical space 918 are represented by virtual tintable windows in virtual building model 930. Mobile device 916 may include integrated scanning capability (e.g., a camera for capturing an image of a barcode or QR code), and/or may include, or be in communication with, an identification capture device (e.g., a handheld barcode scanner connected with mobile device 916, e.g., via a Bluetooth link). ID tags may be comprised of, for example, RFID, UWB, radiogenic, reflective, or absorptive materials to enable use of various scanning tools (e.g., identification capture devices). The code(s) or printed matter on an ID tag may comprise device type, electronic and/or material properties of the target device, serial number, types, identifiers of component parts, manufacturer, manufacturing date, and/or any other pertinent information. [0142] In certain implementations, the virtual building model of a facility stored on a server (e.g., server on a cloud network and/or within the facility) may be updated in real- time, or approximately real-time, to include one or more customer preferences such as a condition of an internal space of the facility. In some cases, the virtual building model is updated to show real-time or approximately real-time, adjustments to one or more devices (e.g., interactive target device 912 in FIG.9) in the facility. For example, the virtual building model may be updated in real-time or approximately real-time, to model future behavior of the facility. For example, a customer may interactively select an internal space in the virtual building model to adjust a preferred amount of light in the space. The customer preference of the preferred amount of light is communicated to the server and
stored in the virtual building model in real-time, or approximately real-time. A visual representation of the future adjusted tint levels of the virtual windows that will meet the preferred condition, and/or the future illuminance levels of the internal spaces in the updated virtual building model may be provided in real time, or approximately real-time, to the customer to show future behavior of the facility. An example of a visual representation of future illuminance levels in virtual spaces of an updated virtual building model is shown in FIG.13B. [0143] Some examples of digital twins, user interfaces, commissioning, networks, smart objects, 3D representations of buildings and spaces, zones of tintable windows and other groupings of tintable windows, and controlling tintable windows are described in U.S. Patent Application Serial No.17,400,596, titled “AUTOMATED COMMISSIONING OF CONTROLLERS IN A WINDOW NETWORK,” filed on August 12, 2021, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. III. Introduction to Optimization Process [0144] At a high level, certain tinting methods described herein include an iterative process (sometimes referred to as an “optimization process”) that is designed to create a target illuminance level or lux level of natural light and/or other internal conditions (e.g., color or light, heat gain, etc.) in one or more internal spaces of a building. This optimization process iteratively adjusts (e.g., through one or more iterations), transmissivity level(s) of one or more tintable windows in a virtual building model until the illuminance level of natural light in the internal spaces reaches, or approximately reaches, the targeted level. The transmissivity level or levels of the one or more tintable windows in the virtual building model act as an adjustable knob (independent variable) that are adjusted to create the target level of natural light, or about the target level of light, in the one or more spaces given the external light from the sky on the building. As part of determining the transmissivity required to create the desired target lux in the space, the light from the sky outside the building being transmitted through the tintable windows into the internal space(s) is calculated. This external light transmitted into the building is calculated based on predicted clear sky data attenuated with sensor readings. The illuminance level in the internal spaces is calculated based on the flux transfer of external light from the sky, through the tintable windows, and into the internal spaces within the building according to the three-phase model described below. The external light from the sky is simulated by a virtual sky dome over the building. The sky dome is based on
predicted clear sky data and measured light from one or more sensors such as from a plurality of photosensors in a multi-sensor device on a roof of the building. As described in more detail below, one or more aspects of the predicted clear sky data are adjusted based on the measured light data to provide an accurate, real-world approximation of the external light from the sky. The transmissivity level or levels from the optimization process is then used to determine a final tint state for the one or more tintable windows in the building. – Three-phase Model [0145] A three-phase model of the light flux transfer from the sky, through the tintable windows, and into the interior of a building may be utilized to model transmission of light to the internal space of the building. The three-phase model may be included in a 3D model of the building or a virtual building model (e.g., digital twin) of the building. The three-phase model can be used to determine the illuminance or lux level at one or more grid points (with x, y, z coordinates) in the interior of the building. The term “grid point” or “point” generally refers to a virtual location expressed in three-dimensional coordinates (x, y, z) and directional vectors (x-direction, y-direction, z-direction). The three-phase model factors the flux-transfer path from the sky to the grid points into three segments associated with three independent flux transfer matrices: (i) the view “V” matrix – flux transfer between tintable window and grid point in the building, (ii) the transmission “T” matrix - flux transfer through the tintable window, and (iii) the daylight “D” matrix – flux transfer between the sky and the exterior of the tintable window. An example of a three-phase model can be found in Subramaniam, Sarith, “Daylight Simulations with Radiance using Matrix-based Methods,” (October 2017), which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. The total flux transfer between the sky and a vector of grid points within the building is represented by the matrix product VTD. [0146] The matrix equation E = VTDS can be utilized to obtain the illuminance matrix “E” representing the illuminance or lux level at each grid point given the “S” matrix of luminance values corresponding to sky conditions at the geographic location of the building. In one aspect, the coefficients of the clear sky “S” matrix may be based on data output from a virtual sky dome model simulation (annual or single point in time) of the light distribution in the sky over the building. In certain aspects, the coefficients of the “S” matrix correspond to luminance levels at clear sky conditions at multiple points in time (e.g., over a year) at a particular geographical location such as the geographical
location of a facility. In certain aspects, an “S” vector represents a vector of luminance levels corresponding to sky conditions at a single point in time at a particular geographical location. The “S” matrix may be calculated by adding multiple “S” vectors at different points in time. The International Commission on Illumination (CIE) and The American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) provide examples of sky modeling approaches using historical weather data that may be used to determine luminance values under various weather conditions at various points in time for input into an “S” matrix. These models can provide direct and diffuse luminance values parameterized by azimuth and zenith angles. “S” matrix coefficients are obtained by discretization of the underlying sky dome model. Some examples of discretization schemes that can be used include Tregenza and Reinhart schemes. In one aspect, the coefficients of the clear sky “S” matrix may be based on data output from a virtual sky dome model simulation (annual or point in time) of the light distribution in the sky over the building. [0147] In one aspect, a sky “S” matrix includes coefficients based on predicted values corresponding to clear sky conditions and measured light data based on sensor readings. In one example, the measured light data is used to attenuate or adjust the predicated values. In some cases, scaling factors are applied to the predicated values based on the sensor readings. For example, if an illuminance value corresponding to readings from a sensor are higher than the illuminance values of the light patch to which the sensor is mapped, the illuminance value may be increased by a scaling factor of 0.10. [0148] FIG.10 is a schematic illustration of a flux-transfer path from the sky 1001 to a grid point 1005 in an interior space 1020, e.g., a room, of a building simulated by a three- phase simulation model, according to an implementation. As shown, the three-phase model segments a flux-transfer path 1007 from sky “S” 1001 to a grid point 1005 in three phases: (i) a first flux transfer from the sky 1001 to the exterior of tintable window 1012, represented as a “D” daylight phase, (ii) a second flux transfer through tintable window 1012, represented as a “T” transmissivity phase, and (i) a third flux transfer from tintable window 1012 to a grid point 1005 in the interior space 1020, represented as a “V” view phase. [0149] Various software, such as open-source RADIANCE, can be used to create the coefficients for the V, T, D and S matrices. Employing RADIANCE may require first converting a virtual building model (e.g., BIM file) into the file format expected by RADIANCE. HONEYBEE is an example of open-source software designed to convert
BIM files into the appropriate format for input into RADIANCE. The V, T, and D matrices are developed using site geometry (e.g., location of a building) derived from, for example, the virtual building model (BIM file). In one aspect, a three-phase model may be generated by at least three operations including (1) tracing the path of light from points in an indoor space to the sky by a calculation of the flux-transfer matrices V, T, and D, (2) estimating the brightness of the sky by calculating an “S” sky vector from, e.g. a virtual sky dome simulation, and (3) relating the brightness (illuminance) of the sky to the brightness inside the space. In one aspect, a “S” sky vector can include illuminance levels at different locations of the sky above the building at a point in time simulation of a virtual sky dome. In one example, the illuminance values may include predicted luminance values (corresponding to clear sky conditions) attenuated based on measured luminance levels from a plurality of sensors. In some cases, the attenuation contribution to the predicted luminance values by the readings from each sensor of a plurality of sensors is scaled. [0150] In one aspect, a “V” view matrix representing a single tintable window may have dimensions of the number of analysis grid point by the number of incoming incidence-angles (as determined by discretization), a “T” transmissivity matrix representing a single tintable window may have dimensions of the number of outgoing incidence-angles by the number of incoming incidence-angles, and a “D” daylight matrix representing a single tintable window may have dimensions of the number of outgoing incidence-angles by the number of incoming incidence-angles. In various aspects, the “S” sky vector generally has dimensions of the number of discretized sky light patches in the virtual sky dome. Incidence-angle can refer to an angle which light travels “into” or “out of” at a particular flux-transfer plane. Examples of discretization schemes that can be used in three-phase-method illuminance modeling are the Reinhart and Tregenza discretization schemes. [0151] By multiplying out VTDS, the illuminance (lux) contribution from each tintable window and/or a facade of the building to each grid point can be determined. For a single facade or tintable window, the “V” view matrix specifies (by incidence-angle) the luminous flux transfer between light traveling from the facade or the tintable window to each member of a set of grid points. Also, for a single facade or tintable window, the “D” daylight matrix specifies the flux transfer from discretized patches of sky (e.g., simulated by corresponding patches of a light dome) to a facade or tintable window at different incidence-angles. In addition, for a single point in time, the “S” sky vector specifies the
intensity (luminance) at each light patch of sky in the light dome. In one example, the “D” daylight matrix can be computed based on the apertures (e.g., dimensions and orientation) of the tintable windows in the building and both the interior and exterior geometry as included in the digital twin (BIM file). [0152] FIG.11 is a schematic illustration of a sky light patch 1102 (∆Sα) of a virtual sky dome providing illuminance (Lα) through an aperture 1113 of a tintable window into a room 1120 and to a grid point 1105 at x coordinates, according to an aspect. The sky light patch 1102 (Sα) has an angular size, an illuminance (Lα), and a direction. The flux transfer E(x)α from sky light patch 1102 (Sα) to grid point 1105 (coordinates X(x,y,z)) is determined based on the three phase modeling of the flux transfer. The illuminance level at coordinates X is determined using E(x)α = VTDS based on illuminance levels from the light patches of the virtual sky dome. – Sky dome [0153] A “sky dome” refers to a model that represents a luminance distribution from, for example, a celestial hemisphere (alternatively another shape) representing the sky over a facility such as a building. The luminance distribution represents light intensity at different areas or light patches of the sky. The luminance distribution can represent measured luminance values (e.g., from sensor readings) and/or simulated luminance values. In certain aspects, a sky dome determines the illuminance distribution as a function of the geographical location of the building (e.g., longitude, latitude, meridian), time, and physically measured radiation data from, e.g., one or more sensors at the site of the building. In one aspect, the sky dome simulation also accounts for historic weather data. The simulated data from a sky dome can be utilized to generate annual and/or single point-in-time illuminance distributions. These illuminance distributions can be used to generate the “S” sky vector and/or “S” matrix for the three-phase model of light flux. [0154] The sky dome is discretized into a plurality of light patches (e.g., curved three- dimensional segments). Each light patch covers solid angles in azimuthal and altitudinal directions. FIG.12A is an illustration of a sky dome 1210 having a plurality of 145 light patches 1120. In this illustration, the sky dome 1210 has the shape of a hemisphere and the light patches are solid angle segments of the hemisphere, each segment covering solid angles in azimuthal and altitudinal directions. In this example, patches 1220 cover azimuthal/altitude solid angles of 0 degrees to 6 degrees, 6 degrees to 18 degrees, 18
degrees to 30 degrees, 30 degrees to 42 degrees, 42 degrees to 54 degrees, 54 degrees to 66 degrees, 66 degrees to 78 degrees, and 78 degrees to 90 degrees. In other examples, other solid angles may be covered by light patches. In addition, or alternatively, other light patch shapes, numbers of light patches, and/or shape of the sky dome may be used. For example, solid angle rectangular segments of the hemisphere may be used. FIG.12B is an illustration of a 2D projection of the sky dome 1210 in FIG.12A. The 2D projection includes the light patch id number (1-145) for each light patch along with its azimuthal angle and altitude angle at the center or centroid of each light patch. [0155] In certain aspects, a “S” sky vector and/or a “S” sky matrix may include coefficients based on data provided by the light patches of the sky dome. In some cases, illuminance values at determined at intervals (e.g., a 2 minute time interval, a 3 minute time interval, a five minute time interval, or a ten (10) minute time interval) for each light patch over a year area to determine the coefficients for an “S” sky matrix. In one example, the illumination values used to determine coefficients are determined based on (1) historical weather condition statistics, including direct and diffuse horizontal illuminance values and dew point, (2) clear sky illumination values, and/or (3) sensor readings. In one example, an illumination value for each light patch is calculated by uniformly sampling illumination values across the light patch. [0156] The sky dome generates the illuminance distribution based on clear sky data attenuated by sensor readings to reflect dynamic changes (obstructions and reflections) in the sky. Various software, such as open source RADIANCE, may be used to generate clear sky data to initialize the illuminance values of the light patches of the sky dome. The clear sky data is calculated based on geographical location of the building (e.g., longitude, latitude, meridian) and time. Sensor data from one or more sensors may then be used to attenuate the clear sky data in the sky dome model to generate a real time sky dome model with real-time (or approximately real time) values based on attenuated clear sky data. [0157] In certain aspects, to attenuate the clear sky data in the sky dome model, sensor readings of measured light data from the one or more sensors are used to determine an attenuation scaling factor applied to the illuminance values of the clear sky data for the light patches of the sky dome. For instance, at a particular time interval, the clear sky contribution of a light patch may be 500,000 lux. According to one or more photosensors of a multi-sensor device, however, there are rain clouds in the portion of the sky represented by the light patch that causes the illuminance levels to be reduced from the
clear sky value by approximately 70%. Based on these real-time sensor readings, an attenuation scaling factor of 0.70 or higher may be determined and the scaling factor is applied to the illuminance value of the light patch. In some cases, the scaling factors are bound within a range such as, e.g., [0.2, 1], [0.5, 1]. Bounding the attenuation scaling factor to a range applies a conservative attenuation factor. For example, if a sensor is malfunctioning and reading 0 illuminance level, if the attenuation scaling factor is bound between [0.2, 1], an attenuation scaling factor of 0.20 is applied rather than 0. [0158] In certain implementations, the real-time sky dome with attenuated clear sky data and a three-dimensional model of the building (e.g., a BIM file or a digital twin) with one or more tintable windows are used to predict the amount of light (e.g., natural light) at one or more grid points within the building. The real-time sky dome with attenuated clear sky data is used to determine an illuminance distribution of external light over the building and the individual contributions of its light patches. The three phase model and the three-dimensional virtual model of the building are used to determine the illuminance levels at one or more grid points internal to the building based on the illuminance contributions of the light patches in the real-time sky dome model that simulate external light to the building. [0159] In one aspect, the real-time sky dome with attenuated clear sky data is based on clear sky data determined for a future time. For example, the clear sky data may be for a future time taking into account the transition time of the tintable window. The clear sky data may be determined for a future time so that a voltage profile can be applied to the tintable window in advance of the future time by at least the transition time to allow the tintable window to transition to the new tint state by the future time. [0160] FIG.13A is an illustration of a 2D projection of the sky dome 1201 shown in FIG.12A depicting illuminance values for light patches based on attenuated clear sky data. In this illustration, the top is North, bottom South, right East, and left West. The light patch at the center is pointing up vertically. The sky dome includes attenuated clear sky data (e.g., predicted clear sky data attenuated with real-time measured light data by using the measured light data as a scaling factor applied to the predicted clear sky data). The illuminance values for the light patches are illustrated by shading. In this illustration, a set of four light patches 1311 is shown to have positive illuminance values and the other light patches have zero illuminance values. [0161] FIG.13B is an illustration of a 2D top view of a virtual building model that is used in conjunction with the sky dome 1310 shown in FIG.13A. The illustration shows
illuminance levels in the interior of the building caused by attenuated external light from the sky provided by the positive illuminance levels in the set of four light patches 1311 shown in FIG.13A. For example, the illuminance from outside the building is shown extending into the building in the 2D, or x-y plane. Given that the illuminance is based in the southern part of the hemisphere, the light is seen radiating into the building in a general north-south direction, and with a northern based vector. This FIG.13B also exemplifies how the attenuated clear sky data may be positioned onto a virtual model of a building. Using the building’s 3D model and its physical characteristics (e.g., window shapes, sizes, and locations, plus overhangs and external building features), the attenuated clear sky data can be used to project the light into the building internal spaces. [0162] FIG.13C is a bar chart of transmissivity levels for each of the tintable windows in the virtual building model. This set of transmissivities, in combination with the sky luminance values in FIG.13A produces the horizontal plane illuminances at different points in the space as seen in FIG.13B. [0163] The real-time sky dome may be used to generate annual and/or point-in-time daylight simulations to determine illuminance values at different locations (e.g., patch locations) of the sky above the building. An annual simulation of the sky dome can be used to populate the sky “S” matrix with illuminance values over a time period of a year. Point in time simulations of the sky dome can be used to populate the sky “S” vector with illuminance values at different locations of the sky above the building at a single time. For example, the illuminance values from the light patches are used to generate the components of the “S” sky vector. – Sensor data used to attenuate clear sky data [0164] In certain aspects, clear sky data for a sky dome model is attenuated with sensor data from readings taken by one or more sensors (e.g., one or more photosensors). In one aspect, the sensor data is based on readings from a plurality of photosensors. The sensor data may be based on readings from photosensors of a multi-sensor apparatus such as a multi-sensor apparatus located on a roof of the building (sometimes referred to herein as a “sky sensor”). In one aspect, a multi-sensor apparatus includes a plurality of photosensors (e.g., 8, 10, 12, etc.) horizontally oriented and equally distributed azimuthally along the circumference of a circular housing. In one example, these sensors may be considered radially arranged and equally spaced around a central. axis. In one implementation, a multi-sensor apparatus has twelve (12) photosensors pointed toward the horizon and
equally distributed azimuthally along the circumference of a circular housing, one (1) photosensor pointed upward vertically, and two (2) infrared sensors pointed upward vertically. Some examples of multi-sensor apparatus can be found in, e.g., PCT application PCT/US2016/055709, titled “Multi-sensor,” filed on October 6, 2016, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. [0165] FIG.14A is a drawing of an isometric view of a portion of a multi-sensor device having twelve (12) photosensors equally distributed along the circumference, 1 photosensor pointed upward vertically, and two infrared sensors pointed upward vertically, according to an implementation. The multi-sensor device 1400 generally includes a housing 1402, at least one light-diffusing element (or “diffuser”) 1404 and a cover housing (or “cover” or “lid”) 1406. As shown, in some implementations the housing 1402, the diffuser 1404 and the cover 1406 are rotationally symmetric about an imaginary axis 1410 that passes through a center of the multi-sensor device 1400. The multi-sensor device 1400 also includes multiple photosensors 1412. In some specific implementations, the photosensors 1412 are positioned annularly along a ring (for example, the ring can have a center coincident with the axis 1410 and can define a plane orthogonal to the axis 1410). In such implementations, the photosensors 1412 can more specifically be positioned equidistantly along a circumference of the ring. In some implementations, the multi-sensor device 1400 further includes at least one photosensor 1414 having an axis of orientation parallel with and in some instances directed along and concentric with the axis 1410. [0166] In the illustrated example shown in FIG.14A, the multi-sensor device 1400 further includes a first infrared sensor 1415A and a second infrared sensor 1415B located on an upper portion of the multi-sensor device 1400 positioned behind a diffusor 1404. The first infrared sensor 1415A and second infrared sensor 1415B may or may not be visible to the human eye from outside the multi-sensor device 1400. Each of the infrared sensors 1415A, 1415B has an axis of orientation that is parallel with the axis 1410 and faces outward from the top portion of the multi-sensor device 1400 to measure temperature readings based on IR radiation captured from above the multi-sensor device 1400. The first infrared sensor 1415A is separated from the second infrared sensor 1415B by at least about one inch. In certain implementations, the multi-sensor device 1400 is installed on the outside a building or other structure such that both the first infrared sensor 1415A and second infrared sensor 1415B are oriented toward the sky in an approximately vertical direction (e.g., direction of gravity vector). When directed vertically toward the
sky, the first infrared sensor 1415A and the second infrared sensor 1415B can output sky temperature readings. In one implementation, the readings taken by the sensors of the multi-sensor device 1400 may be supplied to a building management system and/or to other buildings in the general vicinity. Communication may be established by a cellular communication circuit that also may be included in the multi-sensor 1400 according to a particular implementation. [0167] In one implementation of the illustrated example shown in FIG.14A, the multi- sensor device 1400 is installed outside a building or other structure with its axis 1410 oriented vertically upward. In this case, each of the first infrared sensor 1415A and the second infrared sensor 1415B is oriented vertically upward and the azimuthal orientation of the installed multi-sensor device 1400 is zero and has no impact on the temperature readings from the infrared sensors 1415A, 1415B reflecting the sky temperature above the building/structure. The azimuthal orientation of the multi-sensor device 1400 refers to the angle formed between a line directed due North from the installed multi-sensor 1400 and line along the axis 1410. [0168] Also shown in FIG.14A is a plurality of radially-extending arrows 1416. Each of the arrows 1416 represents an axis of orientation of a corresponding one of the photosensors 1412. Each of the photosensors 1412 is depicted in dotted line indicating that photosensor 1412 itself may or may not be visible to the naked human eye from the exterior of the multi-sensor device 1400 in all implementations (As described in more detail below, the photosensors 1412 are positioned behind a diffuser 1404). Each of the photosensors 1412 is oriented along a respective axis of orientation extending radially outward from the center of the ring (along the direction of a corresponding one of the arrows 1416). In some implementations, the angle of detection of each photosensor 1412 is symmetric about the axis of orientation of the light sensor defining a symmetric “viewing cone.” In some implementations, the angle of detection of each photosensor 1412 is approximately 180 degrees (implying an approximately hemispheric angle of detection). In some implementations, each of the photosensors 1412 has an angle of view (distinct from the angle of detection) that overlaps the angle of view of each of the two respective immediately adjacent neighboring photosensors 1412. The angle of view of the photosensors in multi-sensor device 1400 is the angle defining a viewing cone within which half of the power spectral density in the wavelengths of interest is captured by the light sensor. Generally, the angle of view is twice the angle from the axis of orientation to an outer surface of the viewing cone. In some implementations, each of the photosensors
1412 is the same as the other ones of the photosensors 1412, and thus, the angles of view of each of the photosensors 1412 are generally the same. In some implementations, the axially-directed photosensor 1414 is of the same type as the photosensors 1412. In some other implementations, the angle of view of the axially-directed photosensor 1414 can be narrower than, the same as, or wider than the angle of view of each of the photosensors 1412. [0169] In certain implementations, a multi-sensor apparatus may have a plurality of photosensors arranged at various azimuthal and altitudinal angles. In one implementation, for example, a multi-sensor apparatus may have a plurality of rings of photosensors, each ring having a plurality of photosensors oriented at a particular altitudinal angle and distributed equally along the circumference at different azimuthal angles. In one instance, for example, a multi-sensor apparatus includes a first ring with a plurality of first photosensors (e.g.8, 10, 12, etc.) horizontally oriented, a second ring with a plurality of second photosensor at an altitudinal angle in a range of, e.g., 15 to 45 degrees, and a third ring with a plurality of third photosensor at an altitudinal angle in a range of, e.g., 45 to 75 degrees. In this example, the photosensors in each ring are distributed equally along the ring circumference. Some examples of multi-sensor devices having a plurality of photosensors arranged at various azimuthal and altitudinal angles can be found in PCT application PCT/US2015/053041, titled “SUNLIGHT INTENSITY OR CLOUD DETECTION WITH VARIABLE DISTANCE SENSING,” filed on September 29, 2015, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. [0170] FIG.14B is a schematic drawing of a cross section of a portion of a multi-sensor device 1450 having a first ring 1460 of photosensors 1462, a second ring 1470 of photosensors 1472, and a photosensor 1482 oriented upward vertically along a center axis 1490, according to an implementation. In one example, the second ring 1470 has a smaller number of photosensors (e.g., 4, 6, 8, etc.) than the first ring 1460 (e.g., 8, 10, 12, etc.). The photosensors 1462, 1472 are oriented along an altitudinal angle, θ. The photosensors 1472 of the second ring 1470 are oriented along an altitudinal angle, θ, that is between 0 degrees and about 90 degrees. The photosensors 1462 of the first ring 1460 are oriented along an altitudinal angle, θ, that is about 0 degrees. The photosensor 1482 is oriented along an altitudinal angle, θ, that is about 90 degrees. The photosensors 1462, 1472 in each ring 1460, 1470 may be distributed equally along the circumference at
different azimuthal angles. In other implementations, additional rings of photosensors may be included. [0171] FIG.15 is an isometric view of an example of a multi-sensor device 1500 with photosensors directed at various azimuthal and altitudinal angles of the sky, according to an implementation. Multi-sensor device 1500 includes a circular honeycomb-configured array 1501 of sensor modules 1520 within a hemispherical enclosure, according to an embodiment. Each sensor module 1520 includes a tube 1522 and one or more sensors (for simplicity, components within each tube are not shown). The circular honeycomb- configured array 1501 is segmented into a circumferential dimension of 24 modules and radial dimension of 4 modules, although other dimensions can be used. In this illustrated example, each of the tubes 1522 in the honeycomb array 1501 is aimed at a different region of the sky. There may be more than one type of sensor in one or more of the tubes 1522. In one case, the sensors of the multi-sensor device 1500 are photosensors (e.g., CMOS/CCD sensors). Multi-sensor device 1500 includes a shield 1530 (e.g., glass or other transparent material covering) provided over the entire face illustrated as directed upward) of the multi-sensor device 1500. Shield 1530 may protect the sensors from debris and/or moisture intrusion. The illustrated example shows a cutaway section of the shield 1530 to show inside a sensor module 1520. [0172] FIG.16A is plot of photosensor readings from the thirteen (13) photosensors of multi-sensor device 1400 shown in FIG.14A on a clear sky day on February 16, 2022 in Milpitas California. FIG.16B is plot of photosensor readings from thirteen (13) photosensors of multi-sensor device 1400 shown in FIG.14A on an overcast morning and clear afternoon on April 11, 2022 in Milpitas California. – Mapping sensors to light patches [0173] In one aspect, a method includes operations for mapping one or more sensors from, e.g., a multi-sensor device, to cardinal (azimuthal) directions. In addition, or alternatively, the method includes mapping one or more sensors to the patches of the virtual sky dome. For example, the position, intrinsic field-of-view (FOV), and azimuthal and altitudinal orientations of each sensor may be used to determine the flux transfer coefficients from each sky dome patch to each sensor. Once directionality of the one or more sensors has been established, the readings from the one or more sensors can be mapped to the light patches of the sky dome using, for example, a discretization scheme (e.g., Tregenza scheme) such as shown in FIGS.12A and 12B. After this mapping, a
function (e.g., a sigmoid function) is applied on the scaled value (e.g., 0.5 to 1.0) of the sensor readings and clear sky illuminance. [0174] In one aspect, a method includes operations for mapping a plurality of sensors to cardinal (azimuthal) directions using an m x n dimensional data frame, where m is the number of daylight minutes, and n is the number of days for which photo sensor inputs, are utilized. As different latitudes correspond to different sun trajectories during different seasons, different sensor(s) (e.g., pointing in different directions) may be important at different times of day and/or season. Incorporating these differences can involve performing a data reduction technique (e.g., Principal Component Analysis) to compress time series information from x number of sensors into a one-dimensional vector capturing the y strongest radiation signals received from each cardinal direction. An example of operations for mapping sensors to cardinal directions can be found in PCT Application PCT/US19/46525, titled “CONTROL METHODS AND SYSTEMS USING EXTERNAL 3D MODELING AND NEURAL NETWORKS, filed on August 14, 2019, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. – Zoning management of tintable windows [0175] In some cases, a three-dimensional (3D) architectural model may be used to initialize files (e.g., BIM files) of virtual building model such as a digital twin, to incorporate architectural elements of a facility. Ground truth validation (e.g., from a field service engineer) may be used to verify device data in the files of the virtual building model. The virtual building model may be initialized prior to commissioning the devices at the facility. In some cases, the initialized BIM files (such as, e.g., an Autodesk Revit file) incorporate architectural elements of a facility, but not the devices (e.g., electrochromic devices of tintable windows) installed in the facility. The BIM files may be updated during commissioning and/or updated after commissioning by customers such as occupants or customer support personnel. In one example, the BIM files are updated during an optimization process in real-time, or approximately (about) real-time, by a customer. [0176] In one aspect, one or more virtual spaces of a virtual building model are categorized by space type (e.g., private office, open office, kitchen, conference room, breakroom, and lobby) and/or virtual tintable windows are grouped together in zones, e.g., associated with spaces and/or associated with their orientation. For example, one or more tintable windows that are in locations and orientations that may allow light to be transmitted into a space may be grouped together in a zone. The tinting methods may
adjust one or more zones of tintable windows during the optimization process where each zone includes one or more tintable windows. [0177] FIG.17 is a diagram depicting operations of a method of generating one or more zones of tintable windows and associated orientations of the tintable windows. At operation 1, all enclosures (e.g., rooms) with tintable windows in the 3D model of the facility, such as a BIM file or digital twin, are identified. In some implementation, this operation may be completed during a commissioning process, for example; this operation may also be completed independent of a commissioning process. This operation may include accessing information within the 3D model that indicates whether each room is associated with one or more tintable windows. At operation 2, the names of the enclosures are determined or the enclosures are given identifying names. In the illustrated example, the four enclosures are given the names of private office South, Private Office Southwest, Open Office 1, and conference room. At operation 3, the orientations of each of the tintable windows for the spaces are determined from the building information in the files of the digital file. [0178] At operation 4, the tintable windows associated with an enclosure are grouped into a zone and the zone associated with the space. In the illustrated example, the south- facing tintable windows and the east-facing tintable windows of the space identified as Open Office 1 are grouped together in a zone named “Open Office 1.” In some instances, additional or alternative zones or groupings may be made, such as grouping each tintable window with the same orientation. For example, the south facing tintable windows may be grouped together while the east facing tintable windows may be grouped in a separate or different group than the south-facing group. This grouping may enable the control of different zones or areas of tintable windows that bound a single space, for instance. Using the techniques provided herein, each zone of tintable windows bounding at least a part of a space may have the transmissivity of its tintable windows controlled to create the desired natural light level in the space. Such zoning and control could account for different light levels outside of a space that is defined by exterior tintable windows at different compass orientations. For example, for a space having tintable windows defining at least parts of its south and east sides (such as the open office in Figure 17), the techniques may be able to adjust the transmissivity of a zone of south facing tintable windows to account light conditions and light passing through or affecting those tintable windows, while also independently adjusting the transmissivity of a zone of east facing
tintable windows to account light conditions and light passing through or affecting those tintable windows, and together to create the desired natural lux in that space. [0179] Some examples of zoning management can be found in International PCT Application PCT/US19/46524, titled “CONTROL METHODS AND SYSTEMS USING EXTERNAL 3D MODELING AND NEURAL NETWORKS,” and filed on August 14, 2019 and International PCT Application PCT/US19/23268, titled “CONTROL METHODS AN SYSTEMS USING EXTERNAL 3D MODELING AND SCHEDULE- BASED COMPUTING,” and filed on March 20, 2019, which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties. - Optimization operations [0180] In one aspect, the optimization process includes a sequence of operations that minimize the distance (e.g., squared difference) between a desired illuminance level(s) and the calculated illuminance level(s) in one or more spaces of a virtual building model (e.g., digital twin) by iteratively adjusting the transmissivity level(s) of one or more (virtual) tintable windows in the virtual building model until (A) no further change to the transmissivity level(s) produces negative change in the distance (closer to the desired minima) below a certain value (e.g., -.001) or (B) no further change to the transmissivity level(s) produces a distance that falls below some threshold value. [0181] In one implementation, the transmissivity level or levels of one or more zones of tintable windows may be adjusted so that the distance between the desired illuminance level(s) and the calculated illuminance level(s) in one or more spaces of a virtual building model is below a certain value. Each zone includes one or more virtual tintable windows. [0182] Although examples of the optimization process are described with respect to preferred illuminance levels (or lux levels) in the virtual building model, other customer preferences may be included in other implementations. In addition or alternatively, preferences from multiple customers can also be included in the optimization process. In one aspect, one or more weighting factors may be applied to the preferences. [0183] In one aspect, the tintable windows may be considered to tint instantaneously. In another aspect, the transition time, or tint delay, of the tintable window(s) may be factored into an optimization process. [0184] In one example of the optimization process where tintable windows are considered to tint instantaneously, an optimization function that minimizes the difference between the ith desired illuminance level, pi, and the calculated illuminance level, fi(T), which is a function of transmissivity, T, of the one or more tintable windows, is:
Optimization function: argminT d (fi(T), pi) (Eqn.1) where: i is 1, 2, ..., k where k is the total number of desired light levels [0185] In one example, the optimization function can be written as Optimization function: argminT (fi(T) - pi)^2 (Eqn.2) where: i is 1, 2, ..., k where k is the total number of desired light levels [0186] In another example, the tintable windows are considered to tint over a period of time based on their tint transition rates and associated voltage ramps. In this example, the optimization process may consider illuminance levels of all zones of a building constrained by tint transition rate and associated voltage ramp and the current transmissivity of the one or more tintable windows, and the time until the next tinting opportunity (e.g., next time interval of an optimization process). IV. Tinting methods with optimization process [0187] In certain aspects, control logic for implementing tinting methods includes a process, such as an iterative process (e.g., an optimization process), designed to create a target or desired illuminance level in one or more spaces of a virtual representation of a building based on external light from the sky simulated by a virtual sky dome and based on light flux from the sky to the one or more spaces according to a three phase model. The external light simulated by the virtual sky dome is based on predicted illuminance that is attenuated or scaled based on measured readings generated by sensors at the building. [0188] During the iterative process, the transmissivity (optimized variable) of the one or more tintable windows (e.g., vector with values between 0 and 1 that is used to multiple the “T” matrix) is iteratively adjusted while holding other parameters constant (e.g. the daylight “D” matrix and/or view “V” matrix) until so that the illuminance level in the one or more internal virtual spaces in the building reach, or approximately reach, the target illuminance level(s). At each iteration, the illuminance level at grid points in the one or more internal virtual spaces is determined using the “V” “T” “D” and “S” matrices of the three phase model of light flux. The three phase model of light flux represents external light from attenuated clear sky data passing through the one or more tintable windows in their current tint state, and into the internal space(s) in the building. The virtual sky dome determines an illuminance distribution of light patches from the sky above the building as a function of geographical location of the building (e.g., longitude, latitude, meridian), time, and physically measured radiation data from, e.g., one or more sensors at the site of the building. The simulated data from the sky dome can be utilized to generate annual
and/or single point-in-time illuminance distributions. The illuminance values from light patches of the sky dome can be used to determine the coefficients for the “S” matrix or “S” vector. The attenuated clear sky data of the sky dome is calculated from predicted clear sky data attenuated by readings of measured data from one or more sensors (e.g., photosensors from a multi-sensor device on a roof of the building). Each sensor is mapped to one or more light patches of the sky dome to determine the contribution of measured external light from each sensor to the light patches. [0189] During the optimization process, the “T” matrix may be multiplied by a vector with values between 0 and 1 representing the adjustments to transmissivities of one or more tintable windows in the building. During the optimization process, the vector can be used as an independent variable that is iteratively adjusted until the illuminance level at the grid point is at, or approximately at, the target illuminance level. For example, the “T” matrix may be multiplied by a vector representing adjustments to transmissivities of tintable windows on sides or facades of the building. [0190] In one implementation, a virtual building model may be used to facilitate receiving information associated with preferences for a space or building, such as desired amount of light in a space from a customer (e.g., an occupant such as a tenant of the building or a customer service manager (CSM)). The amount of light corresponds to an illuminance or lux level. For example, the customer or customers may adjust the desired amount of light in the space based on a scale from, e.g., 0 to 1001 to 100, or other similar range. The low end of the scale may correspond to a level of light in the space that results from one or more tintable windows associated with the space being at their lowest level of transmissivity (e.g., about 0.5%, about 1%, or about 2%) and the high end of the scale may correspond to the level of light in the space that results from the one or more tintable windows being at their highest level of transmissivity (e.g., about 52% or about 75%). In one example, the low end of the scale corresponds to approximately 200 lux and the high end of the scale corresponds to 1400 lux. In one instance, a scale of 1 to 100 refers to 0.5% to 52% transmissivity. Once the customer enters their preferred amount of light for a space, the files (e.g., BIM file) of the virtual building model may be updated in real time, or approximately real-time, with the corresponding illuminance level through, for example, an app (software application). The virtual building model stored on a server on, e.g., a cloud network, and/or within the building, may be updated in real-time, or approximately real-time, to include the customer preference for the amount of light and the tint state or tint states of one or more tintable windows may be adjusted to meet the
desired amount of natural light using the optimization process. A virtual representation of the building and/or space, such as the virtual building model displayed in an app or on an electronic device, such as a tablet or computer, may offer visual simulation and proofing of customer preferences and adjustments to the tint state(s) of the tintable windows that result. For example, the virtual representation of the building and/or space display on an electronic device such as a computer may show the resulting illuminance level (associated with the customer preference of the amount of light) in the internal space or spaces of the building (e.g., as shown in FIG.13B) from the optimization process based on the simulated external light currently on the building from the virtual sky dome (e.g., as shown in FIG.13A). [0191] FIG.18 is an illustration of an example of a system 1800 in which a virtual building model 1830 may be used to present a 2D or a 3D virtual model of spaces in a building to a customer based on building information in files (e.g., BIM file) of the virtual building model 1830. System 1800 can be used to receive information associated with a target amount of light for a space in the building and update preferences in files of virtual building model 1830 stored on a server 1840 (e.g., a server on a cloud network) with a corresponding desired illuminance level for the space. The system 1800 includes a mobile device 1816 with a display 1820 and at least one application 1827. The 2D or 3D virtual model may be interactively navigated in conjunction with display 1820 of mobile device 1816. The at least one application 1827 is configured to perform rendering, navigation, updating, and identification functions in concert with the virtual building model 1830. Updating the files of the virtual building model may be done using at least one database in which the virtual building model may reside (e.g., in a memory). The database may be at the building, at another facility, or in the cloud. In the illustrated example, display 1820 includes a 2D virtual model 1822 of spaces in a building. In this example, a customer has selected a virtual space 1822 that is identified as an “Engineering Area” 1823 with a space type of “Open Office” 1824. The customer can then adjust the amount of light in the space 1822 using a slider bar 1825. The slider bar 1825 allows the customer to adjust the amount of light in the space 1822 on a scale of 1 to 100. In this example, the amount of light is set to 20, which corresponds to approximately 200 lux. The amount of light corresponds to an illuminance or lux level. The files of the virtual building model may be updated, e.g., in real time, with the preferred illuminance level corresponding to the amount of light selected by the customer.
[0192] The techniques described herein, such as the optimization process, may then determine a transmissivity or transmissivities of one or more tintable windows in the building that provide the illuminance level, or approximately the illuminance level, associated with the customer’s preferred amount of light in the space. In some cases, the optimization process takes less than 1 minute, less than 2 minutes, less than 3 minutes, etc. The display 1820 may then be updated to display the desired illuminance level of the space and/or tinted version of the one or more tintable windows. Instructions may then be sent to one or more window controllers to apply the voltage profiles that tint the one or more tintable windows according to the determined transmissivity or transmissivities. [0193] FIG.19 is schematic diagram of a system 1900 for controlling tint of one or more tintable windows, according to an implementation. The system 1900 includes a cloud network 1910 and a user interface 1920 configured to receive input from one or more customers. Cloud network 1910 is in electronic communication with the user interface 1920 to receive data input from the one or more customers, update the data, and provide updated data to the user interface. For example, input from the one or more customers may be stored in real-time or approximately real-time, in the cloud network 1910, the files of the virtual building model updated, and visualizations of future behavior at the facility may provided on a 3D model on the user interface 1920 in real-time, or approximately real time. An example of input includes information regarding groupings of tintable windows into one or more zones. Another example of input includes customer preferences such as target values (e.g., target lux values for one or more internal spaces) for a condition of one or more internal spaces in the facility. The cloud network 1920 may have a server configured to store information for each facility such as a virtual building model. System 1900 also includes a service 1930 including an intelligence service 1932 configured to perform one or more operations and a tint state manager 1934 configured to manage the tint state instructions received from intelligence service 1932 and forward final tint instructions to one or more window controllers. For example, tint state manager 1934 may determine whether an override is in place and apply an override tint state if the override is in place. Intelligence service 1932 is in electronic communication with the cloud network 1910 to communication data, e.g., information in the files of the virtual building model and/or the sky matrix or sky vector coefficients. Intelligence service 1932 is configured to determine sensor readings, e.g., by receiving sensor readings stored on cloud network 1910. Alternatively, intelligence service 1932 may be in communication with one or more sensors via cloud network 1910 or via a communication network to
receive sensor readings from one or more sensors. System 1900 also includes a site design system 1940 and a commissioning service 1950 in communication with the site design system 1940. Site design system 1940 may communicate information about the facility such as the latitude and longitude of the facility. As at least part of a commissioning process, commissioning service 1950 is configured to determine and output a clear sky matrix, and V, T, D, S matrix coefficients for each tintable window at the facility to the cloud network 1910. [0194] In one embodiment, techniques described herein, such as the iterative process may incorporate preferred values of metrics in addition to illuminance may be used to determine the transmissivity of tintable windows. For example, preferences for amount of heat radiated into the space may be incorporated into the optimization process. In another example, preference for reduced energy consumption may factor into the optimization process. [0195] In some embodiments, a tintable window may have discrete end tint states, such as 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, or more tint states. In some such implementations, control logic of a tinting method determines an end tint state for each tintable window that is associated with the transmissivity determined by the optimization process and a window controller can transition the tintable window to the end tint state associated with the transmissivity determined by the optimization process. For example, the control logic may determine the end tint state associated with one of the tint states of the tintable window by first rounding up (or rounding down) the transmissivity determined by the optimization process to the closest transmissivity corresponding to a tint state of the tintable window. For example, in on aspect tintable windows are configured to transition to a plurality of 4 tint states (T1- T4) with tint 1 (T1) being a clear state and tint 4 (T4) being the darkest state. In one aspect, T1 corresponds to a transmissivity through a tintable window of about 50% (+/- 10%), T2 corresponds to a transmissivity through a tintable window in a range of about 25% to about 30% (+/- 10%), T3 corresponds to a transmissivity through a tintable window of about 7% (+/- 10%), and T4 (darkest tint state) corresponds to a transmissivity through a tintable window of about 1% (+/- 10%). [0196] In this example, the control logic may round up (alternatively round down) the transmissivity determined by the optimization process to the closest transmissivity associated with one of the 4 tint states. In one instance, for example, if the transmissivity for a first tintable window is determined to be 22% by the optimization process, the control logic may round up to 25% transmissivity, which is associated with tint state T2.
The window controller may then send tint instructions and/or apply voltage profile to transition the tintable window to T2. [0197] While some of the examples presented herein describe tintable windows as configured with four discrete tint states, this disclosure is not limited. For example, the disclosed examples also apply to tintable windows having 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or even more tint levels. As another example, one or more tintable windows may be configured to hold any transmissivity with a range of transmissivity levels, and is considered to have an “infinite” number of tint states. In this example, the control logic may apply a voltage profile to each tintable window that is associated with the transmissivity level determined to cause the target illuminance level in the internal space rather than rounding the transmissivity to a level corresponding with a discrete tint state. [0198] FIG.20 is a flowchart 2000 depicting operations of a method of controlling one or more tintable windows in a facility such as a building, according to various implementations. In some cases, one or more of the operations may be implemented by at least one window controller (e.g., master window controller, network window controller, or local window controller) operatively coupled to the one or more tintable windows. The at least one window controller is also in electronic communication with a server (e.g., a server in the cloud) on which a virtual representation (e.g., digital twin) of the building resides. The server and/or the at least one window controller may be in communication with one or more sensors, e.g., via a building management system. In other cases, one or more of the operations may be implemented by a BMS in operative communication with one or more window controllers operatively coupled to the one or more tintable windows and in electronic communication with a server on which a virtual representation of the building resides. In yet other cases, one or more of the operations may be implemented by a server in the cloud on which the virtual representation of the building resides. [0199] At operation 2020, a virtual building model such as a 3D model e.g., a digital twin of the building is updated based on one or more preferences or inputs provided which may be provided by one or more customers of the building such as, e.g., an occupant of the building, a building manager, or a customer service personnel, or that may be provided as a default or initial input. This input may be received as described herein, such as stored on a memory or input through an app or other program. The preferences include a target amount of light, such as the amount of natural light, for one or more internal spaces in the building. A target illuminance level is determined from the
desired amount of light and the target illuminance level is updated in the files of the virtual representation stored on a server (e.g., a server in the cloud or in the building). [0200] For example, a system (e.g., system 1800 shown in FIG.18) may use files (e.g., BIM file) from the virtual representation to illustrate 2D or 3D virtual spaces in a building to the customer. The customer may then interactively navigate through 2D or 3D virtual spaces of the virtual building to select a space to input a preference such as the amount of light in the space. For example, the customer may adjust the amount of light on a scale of 1 to 100 as described with respect to FIG.18. The low end of the scale may correspond to the highest transmissivity level of the tintable windows associated with the one or more internal spaces and the high end of the scale may correspond to the lowest transmissivity of the one or more tintable windows. The control logic may determine an illuminance level corresponding to the desired amount of light. In certain aspects, the customer may input their preference on a mobile device with an application that is configured to perform rendering, navigation, updating, and/or identification functions in concert with the virtual representation. The preferences including the corresponding illuminance level are transmitted to the server on which the files of the virtual model of the building resides. Updating the files of the virtual representation may be done using at least one database in which the virtual building model may reside (e.g., in a memory). The database may be at the building, at another facility, or in the cloud. In one aspect, based on input by the customer, the files of the virtual building model may be updated in real-time, or approximately real-time, with the preferred illuminance level corresponding to the amount of light selected by the customer and/or one or more other preferences. [0201] In one aspect, multiple customers provide input of desired amounts of light for one or more spaces in the building. If the desired amounts of light are for the same space, an average, weighted average, or mean of the amounts of light may be calculated and the corresponding illuminance level for the space updated in the files of the virtual representation. In one aspect, the customers may be prioritized and weighting factors applied to their input based on the prioritization. [0202] At operation 2030, the control logic determines a luminance distribution from light patches of a virtual sky dome. FIG.12A illustrates an example of a hemispheric sky dome 1201 with one hundred forty five (145) light patches 1210. Each light patch covers a first solid angle in the azimuthal direction and a second solid angle in the altitude direction. The luminance distribution represents light intensity at the light patches of the sky above the building. The sky dome determines the illuminance distribution as a
function of the geographical location of the building (e.g., longitude, latitude, meridian), time, and physically measured radiation data from, e.g., one or more sensors at the site of the building. The simulated data from a sky dome can be utilized to generate annual and/or single point-in-time illuminance distributions. These illuminance distributions can be used to generate the “S” sky vector and/or “S” matrix for the three-phase model of light flux. [0203] The control logic uses the sky dome model to simulate an illuminance distribution based on clear sky data attenuated by sensor readings to reflect dynamic changes in the sky. Various software, such as open source RADIANCE, may be used to generate clear sky data to initialize the illuminance values of the light patches of the sky dome. The clear sky data is calculated based on geographical location of the building (e.g., longitude, latitude, meridian) and time. [0204] Sensor data from one or more sensors may then be used to attenuate the initialized clear sky data in the sky dome model to generate a real time sky dome model with real-time, or approximately real time, values that reflect dynamic changes based on attenuated clear sky data. The readings used to attenuate the clear sky data may be from one or more sensors at the site of the building. For example, the readings may be received from one or more photosensors in a multi-sensor device 1400 in FIG.14A or multi- sensor device 1500 shown in FIG.15. In one aspect, the multi-sensor device is located on a roof of the building. [0205] In certain aspects, to attenuate the clear sky data in the sky dome model, sensor readings of measured light data from the one or more sensors are used to determine an attenuation scaling factor applied to the illuminance values of the clear sky data for the light patches of the sky dome. For instance, at a particular time interval, the clear sky contribution of a light patch may be 500,000 lux. According to one or more photosensors of a multi-sensor device, however, there are rain clouds in the portion of the sky represented by the light patch that causes the illuminance levels to be reduced from the clear sky value by approximately 70%. Based on these real-time sensor readings, an attenuation scaling factor of 0.70 or higher may be determined and the scaling factor is applied to the illuminance value of the light patch. In some cases, the scaling factors are bound within a range such as, e.g., [0.2, 1], [0.5, 1]. Bounding the attenuation scaling factor to a range applies a conservative attenuation factor. For example, if a sensor is malfunctioning and reading 0 illuminance level, if the attenuation scaling factor is bound between [0.2, 1], an attenuation scaling factor of 0.20 is applied rather than 0.
[0206] In one aspect, a method includes operations for mapping one or more sensors from, e.g., a multi-sensor device, to cardinal (azimuthal) directions. In addition or alternatively, the method includes mapping one or more sensors to the patches of the virtual sky dome. For example, the position, intrinsic field-of-view (FOV), and azimuthal and altitudinal orientations of each sensor may be used to determine the flux transfer coefficients from each sky dome patch to each sensor. Once directionality of the one or more sensors has been established, the readings from the one or more sensors can be mapped to the light patches of the sky dome using, for example, a discretization scheme (e.g., Tregenza scheme) such as shown in FIGS.12A and 12B. After this mapping, a function (e.g., a sigmoid function) is applied on the scaled value (e.g., 0.5 to 1.0) of the sensor readings and clear sky illuminance. [0207] In some cases, the illuminance distribution from the sky dome may also account for historic weather data. For example, the clear sky data (e.g., illuminance) used to initialize the virtual sky dome may account for trends in historic weather data at the site of the building. [0208] In one aspect, the files of the virtual sky dome may be stored on a server (e.g., a server on a cloud network. The sensor readings are communicated to the server and the files of the virtual sky dome model are updated, e.g., at intervals and/or at the initiation of the optimization process. [0209] The control logic uses the illuminance distribution from the sky dome to generate coefficients for the “S” sky matrix or “S” sky vector used in a three-phase model of light flux. The “S” sky vector and/or a “S” sky matrix may include coefficients based on data provided by the light patches of the sky dome. In some cases, illuminance values at determined at intervals (e.g., a 2 minute time interval, a 3 minute time interval, a five minute time interval, or a ten (10) minute time interval) for each light patch over a year area to determine the coefficients for an “S” sky matrix. In one example, the illumination values used to determine coefficients are determined based on (1) historical weather condition statistics, including direct and diffuse horizontal illuminance values and dew point, (2) clear sky illumination values, and/or (3) sensor readings. In one example, an illumination value for each light patch is calculated by uniformly sampling illumination values across the light patch. [0210] At operation 2040, the control logic uses processes described herein to determine a level or levels of transmissivity of the one or more tintable windows of the building that provide the target illuminance level, or approximately the target illuminance
level, at one or more spaces (or grid points in the spaces) of the virtual representation based on the simulated distribution of external light from the virtual sky dome and the three-phase model of light flux transfer. In some instances, these grid points in the spaces may include a point on the floor of the space. [0211] In one aspect, the “T” matrix may be multiplied by a vector with values between 0 and 1 representing the adjustments to transmissivities of one or more tintable windows in the building. During the process at operation 2040, the vector can be used as an independent variable that is iteratively adjusted until the illuminance level at the grid point is at, or approximately at, the target illuminance level. For example, the “T” matrix may be multiplied by a vector representing adjustments to transmissivities of tintable windows on sides or facades of the building. During the process, the transmissivity (optimized variable) of the one or more tintable windows is iteratively adjusted using the vector with values between 0 and 1 while the parameters of the other matrices (e.g., daylight “D” matrix, view “V” matrix, and/or “S” matrix) are held constant until the illuminance level at the one or more internal virtual spaces (grid points) in the building reach, or approximately reach, the target illuminance level(s). As used herein, approximately reaching the illuminance level can refer to reaching an illuminance level of one of within about 1%, within about 2%, within about 3%, within about 4%, and within about 5%. At each iteration, the illuminance level at the one or more internal virtual spaces is determined using the “V” “T” “D” and “S” matrices of the three phase model of light flux. [0212] In one implementation, the optimization process includes a set of multi-objective optimization operations applied to the matrix equation E = VTDS. The multi-objective optimization operations minimize the distance function (squared difference) between the desired illuminance level(s) and the calculated illuminance levels at the grid points at the one or more spaces of the virtual building model. In one aspect, the control logic may determine the optimization function is at a minimum if the calculated distance function falls below some threshold. In addition or alternatively, the control logic may determine the optimization function is at a minimum if the gradient of the distance function (with respect to window transmissivity) falling below some threshold. [0213] In one aspect, the optimization process may use an optimization function to minimize the difference such as one of the optimization functions in Eqn.1 and Eqn.2 above. In an example where the one or more tintable windows are considered to tint instantaneously, the optimization function that minimizes the difference between the ith
desired illuminance level, pi, and the calculated illuminance level, fi(T), which is a function of transmissivity, T, of the one or more tintable windows, is either Eqn.1 or the simplified version provided by Eqn.2. As an example where the one or more tintable windows are considered to tint over a period of time based on their tint transition rates and associated voltage ramps, the optimization process may consider illuminance levels of all zones of a building constrained by tint transition rate and associated voltage ramp and the current transmissivity of the one or more tintable windows, and the time until the next tinting opportunity (e.g., next time interval of an optimization process). In some cases, the optimization process takes less than 1 minute, less than 2 minutes, less than 3 minutes, etc. In one aspect, once the optimization process is complete, the interactive display of the virtual building model is updated to display the desired illuminance level of the space and/or the tinted version of the one or more tintable windows associated with the transmissivity determined by the optimization process. [0214] FIG.21 includes a flowchart depicting an example of operations of an optimization process, according to implementations. The operations illustrated in FIG.21 may be, e.g., sub-operations of operation 2040 of the method depicted in flowchart 2000 shown in FIG.20, according to an implementation. [0215] At operation 2042, the control logic calculates an illuminance level (e.g., fi(T)) at a grid point (or grid points) in each three dimensional space of the one or more internal spaces of the virtual representation of the building. The matrix equation E = VTDS can be utilized to obtain the illuminance matrix “E” representing the illuminance or lux level at each grid point given the “S” matrix of luminance values corresponding to sky conditions at the geographic location of the building. In one aspect, the coefficients of the clear sky “S” matrix may be based on data output from a virtual sky dome model simulation (annual or single point in time) of the light distribution in the sky over the building. In certain aspects, the coefficients of the “S” matrix correspond to luminance levels at clear sky conditions at multiple points in time (e.g., over a year) at a particular geographical location such as the geographical location of a facility. In certain aspects, an “S” vector represents a vector of luminance levels corresponding to sky conditions at a single point in time at a particular geographical location. The “S” matrix may be calculated by adding multiple “S” vectors at different points in time. The “V” view matrix specifies (by angle) the light flux transfer between light traveling from the one or more tintable windows to the grid point in the space. The “D” daylight matrix specifies the flux transfer from the sky to the aperture(s) of the one or more tintable windows and can be calculated based on
the dimensions and orientations of the tintable windows. The “T” matrix specifies the current transmissivities of the one or more tintable windows. During the optimization process, the illuminance level at the grid point of each of the one or more virtual spaces is determined based on the current levels of transmissivity of the tintable windows. [0216] In one implementation, the sub-operations may include a set of multi-objective optimization operations applied to the matrix equation E = VTDS. The multi-objective optimization operations minimize the distance function (squared difference) between the desired illuminance level(s) and the calculated illuminance levels at the grid points at the one or more spaces of the virtual building model. The optimization process may use an optimization function to minimize the difference such as one of optimization functions in Eqn.1 and Eqn.2. [0217] At operation 2043, the control logic calculates the distance function (squared difference) between the desired illuminance level(s) and the calculated illuminance levels at the grid points at the one or more spaces of the virtual building model. [0218] At operation 2044, the control logic determines if the optimization function is at a minimum. In one aspect, the control logic may determine the optimization function is at a minimum if the calculated distance function falls below some threshold. In addition or alternatively, the control logic may determine the optimization function is at a minimum if the gradient of the distance function (with respect to window transmissivity) falling below some threshold. For example, the control logic may iteratively adjust the transmissivity level(s) of one or more (virtual) tintable windows in the virtual building model until no further change to the transmissivity level(s) produces negative change in the distance function (closer to the desired minima) below a certain value (e.g., -.001). [0219] If the optimization is determined to not be at a minimum at operation 2044, the control logic adjusts the current transmissivity level or levels of the one or more virtual tintable windows (operation 2046). In one case, if the difference is negative, the transmissivity is increased and if the difference is positive the transmissivity is decreased. In one aspect, the transmissivity level or levels may be adjusted by one of approximately 1%, approximately 2%, approximately 3%, approximately 4%, and approximately 5%. [0220] In one implementation, the control logic adjusts the current transmissivity level or levels of one or more zones of virtual tintable windows at operation 2046. For example, the transmissivity of the one or more zones tintable windows associated with the one or more spaces may be adjusted. For example, the transmissivity of the south-facing tintable windows and the east-facing tintable windows grouped together in the zone
named “Open Office 1” in FIG.17 may be adjusted to meet a desired illuminance level in the Open Office 1 space. [0221] If the optimization is determined to be at a minimum at operation 2044, the control logic proceeds to operation 2050. At operation 2050, the control logic determines a tint state for each tintable window of the one or more tintable windows that is associated with the transmissivity determined by the optimization process. For example, a tintable window may be configured to tint to a plurality of tint states, each tint state associated with a level of transmissivity. The control logic may determine which of the plurality of tint states is associated with a transmissivity determined by the optimization process by rounding up (alternatively rounding down) the transmissivity determined by the optimization process to the closest level transmissivity corresponding to a tint state of the plurality of tint states. For instance, in on aspect the one or more tintable windows may be configured to transition to 4 tint states (T1-T4) with tint 1 (T1) being a clear state and tint 4 (T4) being the darkest state. T1 corresponds to a transmissivity through a tintable window of about 50% (+/- 10%), T2 corresponds to a transmissivity through a tintable window in a range of about 25% to about 30% (+/- 10%), T3 corresponds to a transmissivity through a tintable window of about 7% (+/- 10%), and T4 (darkest tint state) corresponds to a transmissivity through a tintable window of about 1% (+/- 10%). In this example, the control logic may round up (alternatively round down) the transmissivity determined by the optimization process to the next transmissivity level associated with one of the 4 tint states. For example, if the transmissivity for a first tintable window is determined to be 22% by the optimization process, the control logic may round up to 25% transmissivity, which is associated with tint state T2, and determine that the 22% transmissivity determined by the optimization process is associated with the tint state of T2. While some of the examples presented herein describe tintable windows as having four tint states, this disclosure is not limited to such windows. For example, the disclosed examples also apply to tintable windows having 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or even more tint levels. [0222] In one aspect, the one or more tintable windows may be configured to hold any transmissivity with a range of transmissivity levels and is considered to have an “infinite” number of tint states. In this example, the control logic does not perform operation 2050. At operation 2070, the control logic may apply a voltage profile to hold each of the one or more tintable windows at the transmissivity level determined at operation 2040.
[0223] Optionally, (denoted by dashed line) the control logic includes operation 2060. At operation 2060, the control logic applies one or more overrides if an override is in place. In some cases, the control logic may determine whether one or more overrides are in place. If there is an override in place, the control logic sets the final tint state to the override value at operation 2070. In implementations that do not include optional operation 2060, the control logic sets the final tint state to the tint level determined at operation 2050. [0224] In some cases, the override(s) may be from one or more occupants. For example, the override may be input by a current occupant (e.g., a tenant) of the space that would like to override the control system and set the tint level. In other cases, the override(s) may be from a utility company, customer support personnel, building management personnel, etc. For example, an override may be a high demand (or peak load) override, which is associated with a requirement of a utility that energy consumption in the building be reduced. For example, on particularly hot days in large metropolitan areas, it may be necessary to reduce energy consumption throughout the municipality in order to not overly tax the municipality’s energy generation and delivery systems. In such cases, the building management may override the tint level from the control logic to ensure that all tintable windows have a high tint level. In this example, this override may override a user’s manual override. There may be levels of priority in the override values. The override may be input from, e.g., a remote controller, a virtual reality controller, a cellular phone, an electronic notepad, a laptop computer, or and/or by a similar mobile device). [0225] In one aspect, the control logic may be configured to provide statistically- informed foreknowledge of site-specific override values based on past data (also referred to herein as “historical data”). For example, past override values used at a building may be utilized. The site specific values may be stored in memory as time series data. The ability to use past data obtained at a specific location for which a forecast is desired to be made enables the forecast to potentially be more accurate. In one example, determining a forecasted override involves a statistical assessment of the past data such as by taking a mean, an average, or a weighted average of one or more past override values. In another example, determining a forecasted override involves the use of machine learning classification algorithms suitable for clustering time series information into groups whose longitudinal sensor values exhibit similar shapes and patterns. According to the desired level of granularity (for a given hour of day, time of day, week, month, or season of the year), identified cluster centroids will show the trajectory of the mean values of all
records in that time frame whose similarity amongst themselves can be quantitatively distinguished from other groups of similar records. Such distinctions between groups allows for statistically founded inference with respect to “typical” condition desired to be monitored at a given location during a current timeframe. [0226] At operation 2080, the control logic transitions (or sends instructions to one or more controllers to transition) the one or more tintable windows to a final tint state if the tintable window(s) are currently at a different tint state. Alternatively, if the tintable windows are currently in the final tint state, the control logic holds (or sends instructions to one or more controllers to hold) the one or more tintable windows in the final tint state. [0227] In certain implementations, the control logic transitions, or holds, tintable windows based on the zoning of the tintable windows. For example, a transmissivity and final tint state may be determined for a zone of tintable windows, and the control logic may transition or hold the zone of tintable windows according to that transmissivity determined for the zone. [0228] In some cases, a customer spending time in a space of a building may desire real-time control of the level of natural light and/or level of artificial light in the space. This may be the case where a customer prefers sunlight over artificial lighting from, for example, incandescent, light-emitting diode (LED), or fluorescent lighting. Also, it has been found that certain tintable windows may impart too much of a blue color to the room in their darker tint states. This blue color is offset by allowing a portion of unfiltered daylight to enter the room. customer motivations related to the building include lowering energy use through reduction of heating, air-conditioning, and lighting. For example, a customer might want to tint the windows to transmit a certain amount of sunlight through the window so that less energy is needed for artificial lighting and/or heating. A customer may also want to harvest the sunlight to collect the solar energy and offset heating demand. In these cases, the control logic may adjust one or more levels of artificial lighting as well as the transmissivities of one or more tintable windows in the virtual building model that cause a desired level of natural light and/or level of artificial light in the space. Alternatively, the control logic may adjust one or more levels of artificial lighting as well as the transmissivities of one or more tintable windows in the virtual building model that cause a desired level of color and/or intensity of light in the space. Some examples of control logic that adjust artificial lighting to augment color can be found in U.S. Patent Application 15/762,077, titled “METHODS OF CONTROLLING
MULTI-ZONE TINTABLE WINDOWS,” and filed on March 21, 2018, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. [0229] Terms such as “a”, “an” and “the” are not intended to refer to only a singular entity but include the general class of which a specific example may be used for illustration. The terminology herein is used to describe specific embodiments of the invention(s), but their usage does not delimit the invention(s). [0230] When ranges are mentioned, the ranges are meant to be inclusive, unless otherwise specified. For example, a range between value 1 and value 2 is meant to be inclusive and include value 1 and value 2. The inclusive range will span any value from about value 1 to about value 2. The term “adjacent” or “adjacent to,” as used herein, includes next to,” “adjoining,” “in contact with,” and “in proximity to.” [0231] As used herein, including in the claims, the conjunction “and/or” in a phrase such as “including X, Y, and/or Z”, refers to in inclusion of any combination or plurality of X, Y, and Z. For example, such phrase is meant to include X. For example, such phrase is meant to include Y. For example, such phrase is meant to include Z. For example, such phrase is meant to include X and Y. For example, such phrase is meant to include X and Z. For example, such phrase is meant to include Y and Z. For example, such phrase is meant to include a plurality of Xs. For example, such phrase is meant to include a plurality of Ys. For example, such phrase is meant to include a plurality of Zs. For example, such phrase is meant to include a plurality of Xs and a plurality of Ys. For example, such phrase is meant to include a plurality of Xs and a plurality of Zs. For example, such phrase is meant to include a plurality of Ys and a plurality of Zs. For example, such phrase is meant to include a plurality of Xs and Y. For example, such phrase is meant to include a plurality of Xs and Z. For example, such phrase is meant to include a plurality of Ys and Z. For example, such phrase is meant to include X and a plurality of Ys. For example, such phrase is meant to include X and a plurality of Zs. For example, such phrase is meant to include Y and a plurality of Zs. The conjunction “and/or” is meant to have the same effect as the phrase “X, Y, Z, or any combination or plurality thereof.” The conjunction “and/or” is meant to have the same effect as the phrase “one or more X, Y, Z, or any combination thereof.” [0232] The term “operatively coupled” or “operatively connected” refers to a first element (e.g., mechanism) that is coupled (e.g., connected) to a second element, to allow the intended operation of the second and/or first element. The coupling may comprise physical or non-physical coupling (e.g., communicative coupling). The non-physical
coupling may comprise signal-induced coupling (e.g., wireless coupling). Coupled can include physical coupling (e.g., physically connected), or non-physical coupling (e.g., via wireless communication). Operatively coupled may comprise communicatively coupled. [0233] An element (e.g., mechanism) that is “configured to” perform a function includes a structural feature that causes the element to perform this function. A structural feature may include an electrical feature, such as a circuitry or a circuit element. A structural feature may include an actuator. A structural feature may include a circuitry (e.g., comprising electrical or optical circuitry). Electrical circuitry may comprise one or more wires. The electrical circuitry may be configured to coupe to an electrical power source (e.g., to the electrical grid). For example, the electrical circuitry may comprise a socket. Optical circuitry may comprise at least one optical element (e.g., beam splitter, mirror, lens and/or optical fiber). A structural feature may include a mechanical feature. A mechanical feature may comprise a latch, a spring, a closure, a hinge, a chassis, a support, a fastener, or a cantilever, and so forth. Performing the function may comprise utilizing a logical feature. A logical feature may include programming instructions. Programming instructions may be executable by at least one processor. Programming instructions may be stored or encoded on a medium accessible by one or more processors. Additionally, in the following description, the phrases “operable to,” “adapted to,” “configured to,” “designed to,” “programmed to,” or “capable of” may be used interchangeably where appropriate. [0234] Modifications, additions, or omissions may be made to any of the above- described implementations without departing from the scope of the disclosure. Any of the implementations described above may include more, fewer, or other features without departing from the scope of the disclosure. Additionally, the steps of described features may be performed in any suitable order without departing from the scope of the disclosure. Also, one or more features from any implementation may be combined with one or more features of any other implementation without departing from the scope of the disclosure. The components of any implementation may be integrated or separated according to particular needs without departing from the scope of the disclosure. [0235] It should be understood that certain aspects described above can be implemented in the form of logic using computer software in a modular or integrated manner. Based on the disclosure and teachings provided herein, a person of ordinary skill in the art will know and appreciate other ways and/or methods to implement the present invention using hardware and a combination of hardware and software.
[0236] Any of the software components or functions described in this application, may be implemented as software code using any suitable computer language and/or computational software such as, for example, Java, C, C#, C++ or Python, LabVIEW, Mathematica, or other suitable language/computational software, including low level code, including code written for field programmable gate arrays, for example in VHDL. The code may include software libraries for functions like data acquisition and control, motion control, image acquisition and display, etc. Some or all of the code may also run on a personal computer, single board computer, embedded controller, microcontroller, digital signal processor, field programmable gate array and/or any combination thereof or any similar computation device and/or logic device(s). The software code may be stored as a series of instructions, or commands on a CRM such as a random access memory (RAM), a read only memory (ROM), a magnetic medium such as a hard-drive or a floppy disk, or an optical medium such as a CD-ROM, or solid stage storage such as a solid state hard drive or removable flash memory device or any suitable storage device. Any such CRM may reside on or within a single computational apparatus, and may be present on or within different computational apparatuses within a system or network. Although the foregoing disclosed implementations have been described in some detail to facilitate understanding, the described implementations are to be considered illustrative and not limiting. It will be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art that certain changes and modifications can be practiced within the scope of the appended claims. [0237] The terms “comprise,” “have” and “include” are open-ended linking verbs. Any forms or tenses of one or more of these verbs, such as “comprises,” “comprising,” “has,” “having,” “includes” and “including,” are also open-ended. For example, any method that “comprises,” “has” or “includes” one or more steps is not limited to possessing only those one or more steps and can also cover other unlisted steps. Similarly, any composition or device that “comprises,” “has” or “includes” one or more features is not limited to possessing only those one or more features and can cover other unlisted features. [0238] All methods described herein can be performed in any suitable order unless otherwise indicated herein or otherwise clearly contradicted by context. The use of any and all examples, or exemplary language (e.g., “such as”) provided with respect to certain implementations herein is intended merely to better illuminate the present disclosure and does not pose a limitation on the scope of the present disclosure otherwise claimed. No language in the specification should be construed as indicating any non-claimed element essential to the practice of the present disclosure.
[0239] Groupings of alternative elements or implementations of the present disclosure disclosed herein are not to be construed as limitations. Each group member can be referred to and claimed individually or in any combination with other members of the group or other elements found herein. One or more members of a group can be included in, or deleted from, a group for reasons of convenience or patentability. When any such inclusion or deletion occurs, the specification is herein deemed to contain the group as modified thus fulfilling the written description of all Markush groups used in the appended claims.
Claims
CLAIMS WHAT IS CLAIMED IS: 1. A method of controlling one or more tintable windows in a building, the method comprising: determining one or more transmissivities of the one or more tintable windows, wherein the one or more transmissivities are determined to generate a target illuminance level, or approximately the target illuminance level, at one or more grid points in an internal space of a virtual representation of the building, the one or more transmissivities determined based at least in part on attenuated clear sky data that is based at least in part on a predicted clear sky illuminance and readings from a plurality of sensors; and holding, or transitioning, the one or more tintable windows to an end tint state associated with the one or more determined transmissivities.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein if an override is in place, overriding the end tint state with an override tint value.
3. The method of claim 2, further comprising forecasting the override tint value based on a statistical assessment of past tint overrides.
4. The method of claim 1, wherein the plurality of sensors comprises a plurality of photosensors.
5. The method of claim 1, wherein the plurality of sensors is in a multi-sensor device on a roof of the building.
6. The method of claim 1, wherein the plurality of sensors is in a multi-sensor device on a roof of the building.
7. The method of claim 1, wherein: the plurality of sensors includes a first set of sensors and a second set of sensors; the first set of sensors and the second set of sensors are centered about a central axis; and each sensor of the second set of sensors is oriented at an acute angle with respect to the central axis.
8. The method of claim 1, wherein the attenuated clear sky data includes predicted clear sky illuminance attenuated by applying an attenuating scaling factor based on the readings from the plurality of sensors.
9. The method of claim 1, further comprising receiving readings from the plurality of sensors.
10. The method of claims 1 or 9, further comprising attenuating clear sky data based at least in part on a predicted clear sky illuminance and readings from the plurality of sensors.
11. The method of claim 1, wherein the predicted clear sky illuminance is predicted to occur at a future time.
12. The method of claim 1, wherein the predicted clear sky illuminance is based at least in part on historic weather data.
13. The method of claim 1, further comprising: using a virtual sky dome based at least in part on the attenuated clear sky data to simulate external sky radiation impinging the virtual representation of the building; and using the external sky radiation to determine whether the one or more transmissivities generate the target illuminance level, or approximately the target illuminance level, at the one or more grid points in the internal space of the virtual representation of the building.
14. The method of claim 13, wherein: the virtual sky dome includes a plurality of light patches; and the attenuated clear sky data is based on a predicted clear sky illuminance attenuated based on readings from one or more sensors mapped to the plurality of light patches.
15. The method of claim 1, further comprising iteratively adjusting transmissivities of virtual tintable windows in the virtual representation of the building until a current illuminance level in the internal space is at, or approximately at, the target illuminance level.
16. The method of claim 15, further comprising at each iteration, determining the current illuminance level in the internal space based on the attenuated clear sky data and a current transmissivity or transmissivities of the virtual tintable windows.
17. The method of claim 16, further comprising determining the current illuminance level in the internal space (i) using the attenuated clear sky data to determine external light impinging the virtual tintable windows and (ii) calculating light passing through the virtual tintable windows at the current transmissivity or transmissivities into the internal space.
18. The method of claim 1, further comprising adjusting transmissivities of virtual tintable windows in the virtual representation of the building until a current illuminance level in the internal space is at, or approximately at, the target illuminance level.
19. The method of claim 18, further comprising determining, at a plurality of times, the current illuminance level in the internal space based on the attenuated clear sky data and a current transmissivity or transmissivities of the virtual tintable windows.
20. The method of claim 19, further comprising determining the current illuminance level in the internal space (i) using the attenuated clear sky data to determine external light impinging the virtual tintable windows and (ii) calculating light passing through the virtual tintable windows at the current transmissivity or transmissivities into the internal space.
21. The method of claim 1, further comprising rounding up or rounding down the one or more transmissivities to levels associated with a tint state of a plurality of tint states of the one or more tintable windows.
22. The method of claim 1, wherein the one or more tintable windows are grouped into one or more zones of tintable windows.
23. The method of claim 22, wherein: the one or more tintable windows are grouped into two or more zones of tintable windows, a first zone of tintable windows is associated with a first section of a space,
a second zone of tintable windows is associated with a second section of the space, and the first zone of tintable windows faces a compass direction different than the second zone of tintable windows.
24. The method of claim 1, wherein the virtual representation of the building is a digital twin of the building.
25. The method of claim 1, further comprising receiving information associated with the target illuminance level for the internal space.
26. The method of claim 25, wherein the information is received using a digital representation of the building and/or an application on a mobile device.
27. A method of controlling one or more tintable windows in a building, the method comprising: determining one or more transmissivities of one or more tintable windows in the building, wherein the one or more transmissivities are determined based on attenuated clear sky data to generate a target illuminance level, or approximately the target illuminance level, in an internal space of a virtual representation of the building; and forecasting an override tint value based on a statistical assessment of past override values; and holding, or transitioning, the one or more tintable windows to one or more end tint states associated with the one or more transmissivities determined or to the override tint value if an override is in place.
28. A method of controlling one or more internal conditions in a building, the method comprising: receiving a target level for an internal condition of the building using a virtual representation of the building, wherein the target level comprises one or more of an illuminance level in an internal space of the building, a heat gain into the internal space of the building, or a color of light in the internal space of the building; determining one or more transmissivities of one or more tintable windows in the building, wherein the one or more transmissivities are determined to generate the target level, or approximately the target level in the building; and
holding, or transitioning, the one or more tintable windows to an end tint state associated with the one or more transmissivities determined.
29. The method of claim 28, wherein the one or more transmissivities are determined based at least in part on attenuated clear sky data.
30. The method of claim 29, further comprising: using a virtual sky dome based at least in part on the attenuated clear sky data to simulate external sky radiation impinging the virtual representation of the building; and using the external sky radiation to determine whether the one or more transmissivities cause the target level, or approximately the target level, at the internal space of the virtual representation of the building.
31. The method of claim 30, wherein: the virtual sky dome includes a plurality of light patches; and the attenuated clear sky data is based on a predicted clear sky illuminance attenuated based on readings from one or more sensors mapped to the plurality of light patches.
32. An apparatus for controlling tint of one or more tintable windows in a building, the apparatus comprising at least one controller configured to operatively couple to the one or more tintable windows, the at least one controller further configured to perform, or direct performance of, any one of the methods of claims 1 to 31.
33. A non-transitory computer readable medium storing computer executable instructions for controlling tint of one or more zones of tintable windows in a building, when read by one or more processors, cause the one or more processors to execute operations of any one of the methods of claims 1 to 31 34. A system for controlling tint of one or more zones of tintable windows in a building, the system comprises a network configured to operatively couple to the one or more tintable windows and configured to perform any one of the methods of claims 1 to 31.
Applications Claiming Priority (4)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US202263364698P | 2022-05-13 | 2022-05-13 | |
US63/364,698 | 2022-05-13 | ||
US202318034328A | 2023-04-27 | 2023-04-27 | |
US18/034,328 | 2023-04-27 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2023220438A1 true WO2023220438A1 (en) | 2023-11-16 |
Family
ID=88731016
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/US2023/022140 WO2023220438A1 (en) | 2022-05-13 | 2023-05-12 | Intelligence |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
TW (1) | TW202409402A (en) |
WO (1) | WO2023220438A1 (en) |
Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20070053053A1 (en) * | 2005-09-08 | 2007-03-08 | Spd Control Systems Corporation | Intelligent SPD control apparatus with scalable networking capabilities for window and multimedia applications |
US20180307114A1 (en) * | 2015-07-07 | 2018-10-25 | View, Inc. | Control method for tintable windows |
US20190294018A1 (en) * | 2009-12-22 | 2019-09-26 | View, Inc. | Automated commissioning of controllers in a window network |
US20200007762A1 (en) * | 2017-07-05 | 2020-01-02 | Dallmeier Electronic Gmbh & Co. Kg | Multi-sensor camera |
US20200260556A1 (en) * | 2012-03-13 | 2020-08-13 | View, Inc. | Adjusting interior lighting based on dynamic glass tinting |
-
2023
- 2023-05-12 WO PCT/US2023/022140 patent/WO2023220438A1/en unknown
- 2023-05-15 TW TW112117858A patent/TW202409402A/en unknown
Patent Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20070053053A1 (en) * | 2005-09-08 | 2007-03-08 | Spd Control Systems Corporation | Intelligent SPD control apparatus with scalable networking capabilities for window and multimedia applications |
US20190294018A1 (en) * | 2009-12-22 | 2019-09-26 | View, Inc. | Automated commissioning of controllers in a window network |
US20200260556A1 (en) * | 2012-03-13 | 2020-08-13 | View, Inc. | Adjusting interior lighting based on dynamic glass tinting |
US20180307114A1 (en) * | 2015-07-07 | 2018-10-25 | View, Inc. | Control method for tintable windows |
US20200007762A1 (en) * | 2017-07-05 | 2020-01-02 | Dallmeier Electronic Gmbh & Co. Kg | Multi-sensor camera |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
TW202409402A (en) | 2024-03-01 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
JP7124048B2 (en) | Control method for tint adjustable windows | |
US10802372B2 (en) | Control method for tintable windows | |
JP7260222B2 (en) | Control methods and systems using external 3D modeling and schedule-based computing | |
US20210302799A1 (en) | Remote management of a facility | |
US11719990B2 (en) | Control method for tintable windows | |
CN107111287B (en) | Multiple interactive systems at a site | |
JP2023113633A (en) | Control method for tintable window | |
RU2688844C2 (en) | Method of controlling tinted windows | |
US11960190B2 (en) | Control methods and systems using external 3D modeling and schedule-based computing | |
CA3129952A1 (en) | Remote management of a facility | |
US11966142B2 (en) | Control methods and systems using outside temperature as a driver for changing window tint states | |
US20230408883A1 (en) | Control method for tintable windows | |
US20230194115A1 (en) | Environmental adjustment using artificial intelligence | |
CA3169929A1 (en) | Environmental adjustment using artificial intelligence | |
WO2023220438A1 (en) | Intelligence | |
CN114631053A (en) | Control method and system using outdoor temperature as driving factor for changing window tone state | |
US20240210781A1 (en) | Control methods and systems using external 3d modeling and schedule-based computing |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 23804359 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |